RSLogix™ 5000 Level 3: Project Development
Student Manual
Important User Information This documentation, whether, illustrative, printed, “online” or electronic (hereinafter “Documentation”) is intended for use only as a learning aid when using Rockwell Automation approved demonstration hardware, software and firmware. The Documentation should only be used as a learning tool by qualified professionals. The variety of uses for the hardware, software and firmware (hereinafter “Products”) described in this Documentation, mandates that those responsible for the application and use of those Products must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to ensure that each application and actual use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards in addition to any applicable technical documents. In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc., or any of its affiliate or subsidiary companies (hereinafter “Rockwell Automation”) be responsible or liable for any indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of the Products described in this Documentation. Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability for damages of any kind based on the alleged use of, or reliance on, this Documentation. No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in the Documentation. Except as specifically agreed in writing as part of a maintenance or support contract, equipment users are responsible for:
properly using, calibrating, operating, monitoring and maintaining all Products consistent with all Rockwell Automation or third--party provided instructions, warnings, recommendations and documentation;
ensuring that only properly trained personnel use, operate and maintain the Products at all times; staying informed of all Product updates and alerts and implementing all updates and fixes; and all other factors affecting the Products that are outside of the direct control of Rockwell Automation. Reproduction of the contents of the Documentation, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation is prohibited. Throughout this manual we use the following notes to make you aware of safety considerations: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you: identify a hazard avoid a hazard recognize the consequence
Important User Information Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that surfaces may be dangerous temperatures.
Comment Form
Email:
[email protected] or Fax:
440.646.4425
Page 1 of Date:
Contact Information: Name: Company and Location: Phone:
Email:
Comments (include lesson title, if applicable): Course or Product Name (Important):
Page 2
Table of Contents
Introduction Course Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Course Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Who Should Attend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meeting Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Student Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hands-On Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certificate Candidates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration and Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000 Curriculum Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I I I II II III IV IV IV V V
Lessons Updating Logix5000 Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Module Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exercise: Updating Logix5000 Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Project Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watchdog Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1- 1 1--1 1--1 1--1 1--1 1--1 1--3 1--3
1- 5 1--5 1--6 1--8 1--8
2- 1 2--1 2--1 2--1 2--1 2--1 2--2 2--2 2--3 2--3
ii
Table of Contents
Inhibited Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting a Program Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual Program Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overhead Timeslice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asynchronous Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Organization Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Project Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying Tasks, Programs, and Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2--4 2--4 2--5 2--5 2--6 2--8 2--8 2--9 2--10 2--11 2--11 2--12 2--12 2--13 2--13
Exercise: Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 15 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Task Type Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Periodic Task Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Project Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Task Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Time Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Task Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Periodic Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Periodic Task and Continuous Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Multiple Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Equal Priorities (Timeslicing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2--15 2--17 2--18 2--18
3- 1 3--1 3--1 3--1 3--1 3--2 3--2 3--3 3--4 3--4 3--5 3--6 3--6 3--6 3--7 3--7 3--7 3--8 3--8 3--9 3--9
Table of Contents
iii
Exercise: Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 11 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tag Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tag Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining an Alias Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Produced and Consumed Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Array of Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Array Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Three Dimensional Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Array Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numeric Element Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Numeric Element Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Numeric Element Addressing for Multiple Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Element Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Variable Element Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numeric Bit Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Numeric Bit Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Bit Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Variable Bit Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Array Addressing Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Tags Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tags and Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring and Editing Tag Values through a Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Ladder Logic Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Function Block Diagram Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring and Editing Tag Values in the Watch Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3--11 3--12 3--14 3--14
4- 1 4--1 4--1 4--1 4--1 4--2 4--3 4--4 4--4 4--5 4--5 4--5 4--6 4--6 4--7 4--7 4--8 4--8 4--9 4--9 4--9 4--9 4--10 4--10 4--10 4--10 4--11 4--11 4--11 4--11 4--11 4--12 4--12 4--12 4--12 4--13 4--13 4--14 4--15
iv
Table of Contents
Quick Watch Tag Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Persistent Quick Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Data in RSLinx Classic Professional Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Access Control Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4--15 4--16 4--17 4--17 4--17 4--17 4--18 4--18 4--18
Exercise: Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 19 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a User-Defined Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: User-Defined Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Arrays and User-Defined Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User-Defined Data Type Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User-Defined Data Type Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples: User-Defined Data Type Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting and Importing User-Defined Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASCII Mnemonic Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4--19 4--21 4--21 4--21 4--22 4--22 4--25
5- 1 5--1 5--1 5--1 5--1 5--2 5--3 5--3 5--3 5--3 5--4 5--5 5--5
5- 7 5--7 5--9 5--10 5--10
6- 1 6--1 6--1 6--1 6--2
Table of Contents
Configuring Ladder Logic Quick Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying and Reusing Ladder Logic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Copied Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Short-Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying a Project or a Project Component Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performing Online Ladder Logic Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finalize Edits Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Zone Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online Editing in a Multiple-User Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v
6--2 6--2 6--3 6--4 6--4 6--4 6--5 6--6 6--7 6--8 6--9 6--9
Exercise: Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project 6- 11 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keying Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Exact Match Keying Prevents Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Compatible Keying Prevents Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Compatible Keying Allows Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabled Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asynchronous I/O Update Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Module Multicasting Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPI (Requested Packet Interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COS (Change of State) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: RPI and COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Module Multicasting Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTS (Real Time Sampling Rate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6--11 6--13 6--14 6--14
7- 1 7--1 7--1 7--1 7--1 7--2 7--2 7--3 7--3 7--4 7--4 7--4 7--4 7--5 7--5 7--5 7--6 7--6 7--7 7--8 7--9 7--10
Exercise: Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 11 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7--11 7--13
vi
Table of Contents
Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduled Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Produced and Consumed Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Produced and Consumed Tag Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Produced Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Controller to an I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Consumed Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tag Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Produced and Consumed Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Produced Tag Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Produce/Consume Tag RPI Limits Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7--14 7--14
8- 1 8--1 8--1 8--1 8--1 8--2 8--2 8--3 8--4 8--4 8--6 8--7 8--7 8--8 8--10 8--10
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data . . . . . 8- 11 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EtherNet/IP Network Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Private IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subnets and Subnet Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How a Subnet Mask Operates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Overview and Software Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an EtherNet/IP Module and Controller to an I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Produced and Consumed Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8--11 8--13 8--13 8--14 8--16 8--16 8--18
9- 1 9--1 9--1 9--1 9--1 9--2 9--3 9--3 9--4 9--4 9--5 9--6 9--6 9--6 9--7 9--7
Table of Contents
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
9- 9 9--9 9--11 9--12 9--12
Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of RPI on EtherNet/IP Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Effect of RPI on EtherNet/IP Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: No Rack Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Rack--optimized Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10--1 10--1 10--1 10--1 10--1 10--2 10--2 10--2 10--3 10--4
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . 10- 5 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10--5 10--6 10--8 10--8
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Task Type Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Task Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Project Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Task Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumed Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Input Data State Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756 Local and Remote Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick-Response Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short-Duration Input Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronized-Execution Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Bit Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Input Data State Change -- Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Output Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11--1 11--1 11--1 11--1 11--2 11--2 11--2 11--3 11--3 11--4 11--4 11--5 11--5 11--5 11--6 11--6 11--6 11--7 11--7
viii
Table of Contents
Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Time Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Task Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOT Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UID/UIE Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPS Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11--8 11--9 11--9 11--9 11--10 11--10 11--11 11--12 11--12
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 13 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11--13 11--13 11--14 11--16 11--16 11--18 11--20 11--20 11--21 11--23
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Controller System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSV/SSV Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Source or Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: GSV Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: SSV Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Status Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arithmetic Status Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Recoverable Major Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recoverable Major Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recoverable Major Fault Processing: Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Fault Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recoverable Major Fault Processing: Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12--1 12--1 12--1 12--1 12--2 12--2 12--2 12--2 12--3 12--4 12--5 12--5 12--6 12--6 12--6 12--7 12--7 12--8 12--8 12--8 12--9
Table of Contents
Multiple Recoverable Major Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Major Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minor Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
12--10 12--10 12--10 12--12 12--12
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 13 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12--13 12--14 12--14 12--15 12--15 12--17 12--18 12--18 12--19 12--22
Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTD Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13--1 13--1 13--1 13--3 13--3 13--3 13--4 13--4
Exercise: Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . 13- 5 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Attribute for the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13--5 13--5 13--6 13--8 13--8
Configuring a Logix5000 Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unscheduled Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Messages to Logix5000 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Messages to Other Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14--1 14--1 14--1 14--1 14--1 14--2 14--2
x
Table of Contents
Read, Write, and Block Transfer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Entering a Numeric Communications Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIP Generic Message Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14--3 14--4 14--4 14--5 14--6 14--6
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14- 7 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14--7 14--9 14--9 14--11 14--12 14--12 14--14
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of an Add-On Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . An Add-On Instruction Uses a Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Parts of the Definition of an Add-On Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routine “Type” Control Editable in AOI Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changes to the Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Instruction Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning the Parameters of an Add-On Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language for the Logic Routine of the Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organization of the Logic Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Scan Mode Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deciding If You Need an EnableInFalse Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Parameters via Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing an Add-On Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting and Importing an Add-On Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15--1 15--1 15--1 15--1 15--2 15--3 15--4 15--5 15--5 15--6 15--7 15--8 15--9 15--9 15--9 15--9 15--10 15--10 15--10 15--11 15--12 15--12 15--12 15--12 15--13 15--13 15--14 15--14
Table of Contents
Online Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Referenced Add--On Instructions and User-Defined Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: When Not To Include Referenced Add-On Instructions and User-Defined Data Types Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Add-On Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter the General Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter the Definition Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Parameters and Local Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Looking for Previously Developed Add-On Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search the Sample Code Library (samplecode.rockwellautomation.com) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Search Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Detect_Jam Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
15--15 15--16 15--16 15--16 15--17 15--17 15--17 15--18 15--18 15--19 15--19 15--19 15--19 15--20 15--20 15--20 15--20
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15- 21 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15--21 15--22 15--23 15--23 15--24 15--27 15--27 15--28 15--30 15--30 15--31 15--31 15--31 15--31 15--33
Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a .acd Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a .l5k Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a .l5x XML File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compare Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16--1 16--1 16--1 16--1 16--2 16--3 16--4 16--5 16--5
xii
Table of Contents
Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16--6 16--6
Exercise: Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16- 7 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16--7 16--9 16--10 16--10
Allocating Connections in a Logix5000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conserving Connections by Grouping Produced Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Connection Requirements for Tags vs. an Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17--1 17--1 17--1 17--1 17--1 17--2 17--2 17--3 17--3 17--4
Exercise: Allocating Connections in a Logix5000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17- 5 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17--5 17--5 17--6 17--6
Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18--1
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project . . . . . . . . . . . 18- 3 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18--3 18--8 18--10 18--10
Optional Lessons Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network . . . . . 19- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ControlNet Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19--1 19--1 19--1 19--1 19--1
Table of Contents
Cable System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduled Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unscheduled Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Exchange on the ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NUT (Network Update Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SMAX (Scheduled Maximum Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: SMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UMAX (Unscheduled Maximum Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: UMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPI (Requested Packet Interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . API (Actual Packet Interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: RPI and API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Overview and Software Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a ControlNet Module and Controller to an I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Produced and Consumed Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling a New ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
19--3 19--4 19--4 19--4 19--5 19--5 19--5 19--6 19--6 19--7 19--7 19--8 19--8 19--9 19--9 19--9 19--10 19--10 19--11 19--11 19--11 19--14 19--14
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19- 15 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................ How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19--15 19--15 19--17 19--18 19--18
Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . 20- 1 What You Will Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Will Do This . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ControlNet Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Here’s How . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demonstration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20--1 20--1 20--1 20--1 20--2 20--2
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network . . . . . 20- 3 Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Did You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20--3 20--4 20--6 20--6
xiv
Table of Contents
Appendices I/O Wiring Diagrams For The Assembly Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A- 1 Slot 0 -- 1756-OB16D Digital Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot 2 -- 1756-IB16D Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot 4 -- 1756-OB16D Digital Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................ Slot 7 -- 1756-OF6VI Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot 8 -- 1756-IF6I Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A--1 A--2 A--3 A--3 A--4 A--5
ControlLogix Workstation I/O Device Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 1 Local I/O Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B--2
Node Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 1
Course Overview
I
Course Overview
Course Purpose
Upon completion of this course, given a functional specification for an RSLogix 5000 application, you will be able to develop a project to meet the requirements of the specification. This course covers tasks common to the following controllers, which all use the Logix5000 control engine, or operating system: ControlLogix controllers
CompactLogix controllers SoftLogix controllers DriveLogix controllers This course builds upon your knowledge of common controller terms and operation and your experience with basic ladder logic programming. This course presents a deeper understanding of project development tasks that are common to all Logix5000 controllers. Such tasks include organizing tasks and routines, organizing controller data, configuring modules, and sharing data. You will also use Producer/Consumer technology to multicast input and output devices, share data between controllers, and control remote I/O.
Who Should Attend
Individuals who need to develop RSLogix 5000 projects for any Logix5000 controller should attend this course. Activity: Introduce yourself, say the company you work for, and tell the instructor and others what you hope to take away from this course.
Course Overview
II
Prerequisites
To successfully complete this course, the following prerequisites are required: Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals course (Course No. CCP146), or completion of the RSTrainer for ControlLogix Fundamentals computer-based training course (9393-RSTCLX), or knowledge of common controller terms and operation
Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic
Programming course (Course No. CCP151) or the ability to write basic ladder logic with common instructions, such as bit, timer, counter, move, and comparison instructions Question: Is everyone comfortable with these skills?
Agenda
This course consists of the following lessons: Day 1
15 minutes 20 minutes (40 minutes with optional exercise) 90 minutes 60 minutes 160 minutes 30 minutes
Course Overview Updating Logix5000 Firmware Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Day 2 60 minutes 185 minutes 90 minutes 90 minutes
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network (continued)
Course Overview
III
Day 3 45 minutes
Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network
120 minutes 90 minutes
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
60 minutes 105 minutes
Programming a BTD Instruction Configuring a Logix5000 Message Day 4
90 minutes 40 minutes 60 minutes 225 minutes 120 minutes 65 minutes
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files Allocating Connections in a Logix5000 System Integrated Practice -- Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project Optional: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Optional: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network
Meeting Course Objectives
The following course structure is generally used to help you understand the content and activities: One lesson is devoted to each task. Typical lesson includes most or all of these sections:
-----
“What You Will Learn” -- lesson objectives “Before You Begin” -- preparatory material “Here’s How” -- demonstration of procedures “Exercise” - opportunity to perform new skills, often in a hands-on lab environment -- “How Did You Do?” -- where to go for feedback on performance -- “Answers” -- answers to exercises Integrated practices provide an opportunity to perform tasks using the skills obtained during the training.
IV
Course Overview
Student Materials
To enhance and facilitate your learning experience, the following materials are provided as part of the course package: Student Manual, which contains the topical outlines and exercises. Use this manual to follow presentations, take notes, and work through your exercises.
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide, which provides
all of the steps required to complete basic RSLogix 5000 software tasks that are common to all Logix5000 hardware platforms. By following the procedures in this job aid, you can immediately apply what is learned in the course to your own job. Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual, which contains guidelines for designing a Logix5000 application. Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide, which contains several relevant technical publications. This searchable, electronic resource contains the most frequently referenced programming information and is a quick and efficient on-the-job resource. Reference: Your instructor will show you these job aids now.
Hands-On Exercises
Throughout this course, you will have the opportunity to practice the skills you have learned through a variety of hands-on exercises. These exercises focus on the skills introduced in each lesson. You will also have the opportunity to combine and practice several key skills by completing an integrated practice. To complete the exercises and the integrated practice, you will use a ControlLogix hardware workstation. Because the basic skills taught in the course apply to all Logix5000 platforms, you can apply what you have learned to the specific platform that you use in your plant.
Certificate Candidates
If you are a candidate for a Certificate Exam, you must: Take notes Ask questions for clarification
Follow along with demonstrations using the job aids Complete all labs
Tip "
The Certificate Exam questions are scenario--based and may require you to understand information from all of these areas. To study for the exam, you must keep all class materials and your written notes.
Course Overview
Configuration and Programming Examples
V
The configuration and programming examples shown in this course are intended solely for purposes of example. You will have different requirements associated with your application. You must verify that the necessary steps have been taken to meet all performance and safety requirements. Reference: See the Important User Information in your Student Manual for more details.
ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000 Curriculum Map
After completing this training, you may be interested in one or more of the following courses: RSLogix Level 4: PhaseManager Project Design [CCP711, 1 day] RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion Programming Using Ladder Logic [CCN142, 3 days] GuardLogix Application Development [SAF-LOG101, 2 days] Reference: See the curriculum map in the front of your Student Manual for a complete listing of available ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000 courses.
VI
Course Overview
Lesson Note that this lesson briefly reviews prerequisite concepts before presenting the firmware piece. Tailor this lesson as needed.
What You Will Learn
1
Updating Logix5000 Firmware After completing this lesson, you should be able to update module firmware.
When You Will Do This You will perform these tasks in the following situations: You will need to update module firmware: -- When installing a brand new ControlLogix controller -- When upgrading to a newer version of RSLogix 5000 software to ensure hardware and software remain in lockstep
Before You Begin
Review
The PowerPoint presentation contains hidden slides that can be used to conduct the review.
Activity: Your instructor will briefly review uploading, downloading, and going online to a controller.
Topics include keyswitch positions; uploading, downloading, and going online; and interpreting a communications path.
Updating Module Firmware
State that customers can obtain the required revision levels at the support.rockwellautomation.com/support website for ControlFLASH. Note that a minimum of one communications device is required to update modules. Serial communications can be used, but data transfers at the slowest rate. Method ControlFLASH Utility
AutoFlash Function
To use all of the features of a new revision of RSLogix 5000 software, controller and servo module firmware must be in lock-step with software. The firmware loaded in Logix5000 controllers and motion modules must match the version of RSLogix 5000 software you are using.
There are three methods available for updating module firmware: How Used Standalone tool (can be launched manually or through RSLogix 5000 software). Integrated with RSLogix 5000 software. It automatically checks firmware during project download.
Devices Supported Controllers, communication modules, I/O modules, SERCOS drives, and other devices.
Communication Supported Valid CIP path to device being updated (includes serial, DeviceNet, ControlNet, EtherNet/IP).
(Continued)
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. FW3sb56r
1--2
Updating Logix5000 Firmware
Method
Firmware Supervisor
How Used
Integrated on the controller CompactFlash card and runs without user intervention.
Devices Supported Supports local and remote devices that: Are in the I/O tree and configured as Exact Match. Support firmware upgrades via ControlFLASH. Are at a hardware revision that supports the firmware stored for that device.
Communication Supported
Supports all communication paths to devices in the controller I/O tree that also support ControlFLASH.
When updating a module’s firmware, note the following key points: Updating a module will delete the current module contents. Updating module firmware temporarily disables the module from controlling other devices. Evaluate what portion(s) of a process the module may control before starting an update. Interrupting an update by disabling communications or removing the module from the chassis may damage the module.
Do not backflash a 1756-I/O module’s firmware from firmware revision 3.x to 2.x. Attempting to backflash or downgrade the module’s firmware will irreversibly damage the module. You must return modules damaged by an attempt to backflash to firmware 2.x to Rockwell Automation.
Do not flash a 1756-I/O module’s firmware from firmware revision 2.x to 3.x. Attempting to flash a module’s firmware will irreversibly damage the module.
Do not backflash 1756-SOE (Sequence of Events) modules at firmware revision 1.6 to revision 1.5 or earlier. Backflashing SOE modules at firmware revision 1.6 may cause the SOE module to stop working and require that the module be returned for repair.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 FW3sb56r
Updating Logix5000 Firmware
Tip "
Here’s How IMPORTANT: When performing Exercise A, be sure to run the Quick Start video for the students on the overhead. This will eliminate the need for earphones or the distraction of overlapping audio during the exercise.
1--3
If you have questions regarding the compatibility of RSLogix 5000 software with specific controllers or hardware modules, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation Technical Support. To update module firmware. Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the steps below and the information on the Demonstration Checklist to help guide you during the demonstration: IMPORTANT: Before performing this demonstration, ensure that the controller in slot 3 of your demonstration workstation has been back-flashed to a firmware version below version 17. Use the FW3_1756R_DEM1.acd file to download and go online to the controller in Slot 1.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Download the first project and go online.
-
Download the second project to the controller.
-
What happens when the project is downloaded?
-
How is this situation resolved?
-
What tools are available for flashing module firmware?
Use the FW3_1756R_DEM2.acd file to download to the controller in slot 3. When the firmware revision mismatch occurs, show students how the automatic firmware update feature works. Important: Emphasize that flashing firmware will not be practiced in the lab.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. FW3sb56r
1--4
Updating Logix5000 Firmware
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 FW3sb56r
Exercise: Updating Logix5000 Firmware
1--5
Exercise: Updating Logix5000 Firmware Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice updating Logix5000 firmware. Activity: As a group, you will view the Update a Module’s Firmware Quick Start tutorial. The steps below will help you access the file for later review or independent practice.
This exercise uses RSLogix 5000 Start Pages to demonstrate the controller flashing procedure. Do not perform this procedure on the workstation unless authorized to do so. Failure to correctly perform this procedure can make the controller inoperable.
Context: Before flash updating the new ControlLogix controllers you recently received, you will review the proper flash update procedure and answer the corresponding questions. Directions: 1. If it is closed, open RSLogix 5000 software. 2. View the Start Page. 3. Click the Learning Center tab. 4. From the How Do I? menu, select the Maintain folder. 5. View the Update a Module’s Firmware tutorial.
Tip "
Although the video focuses on the CompactLogix platform, the basic steps can be applied to any Logix5000 controller that supports flash download. 6. Which modules must always be in lock-step with the version of RSLogix 5000 you are using?
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. FW3e56r
1--6
Exercise: Updating Logix5000 Firmware
7. When is a maintainer most likely to update other modules (I/O, communications, etc.)?
8. What tool can be used to update module firmware?
How Did You Do?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Turn to the Answers section.
Rev. August 2012 FW3e56r
Exercise: Updating Logix5000 Firmware
Rev. August 2012
1--7
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. FW3e56r
1--8
Exercise: Updating Logix5000 Firmware
Answers
Exercise A 6. Your controllers, motion modules, and SERCOS drives all must match the version of RSLogix 5000 software you are using. 7. A maintainer is most likely to update other module firmware when replacing a failed module. 8. The ControlFLASH tool can be used to update module firmware.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 FW3e56r
Lesson
2
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project What You Will Learn Important: This lesson covers the default project organization. Periodic tasks and event tasks are covered in separate lessons.
Stress that deleting project components is not as simple as selecting delete from a right-click menu. Because deleting can be done online, it is a more detailed procedure. Note that the use of tasks and programs is a major difference from RSLogix 5 and 500 softwares.
Before You Begin Note that .l5k text files are part of a separate lesson.
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Create a new RSLogix 5000 project file Modify controller properties
Create a program and routine Adjust a program schedule Copy and reuse programs and routines Delete a routine, program, and task Verify tasks, programs, and routines
When You Will Do This Before you enter the logic for your application, you have to configure the tasks, programs, and routines that will run the logic.
Key Terms Project/Project File: The RSLogix 5000 software file used to store all programming and configuration information for a Logix5000 controller.
Project Organization State that the multitasking system is like 32 separate PLC-5 controllers that take turns controlling. Note that task execution is based on priorities that are assigned by the user. This will be discussed in detail later.
Rev. August 2012
A Logix5000 controller is a preemptive, multitasking controller with the following characteristics: Is single-threaded in that only one task will be active at a time Has the ability to interrupt an executing task, switch to a different task, then return control back to the original task when the interrupting task is complete
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TS2sb56r
2--2
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
Clarify that tasks and programs are organizing elements (like folders in Windows Explorer). Routines contain the actual ladder logic.
To maximize these multitasking capabilities, the following containers are available to organize an RSLogix 5000 project: Task: A scheduling mechanism for executing its scheduled programs.
Program: A set of related routines and tags. Routine: A set or sequence of executable code. Default Project Structure By default, there is one task, program, and routine created in each new project: When reviewing this graphic, note the following elements: 1. Each task can be divided into programs based on function, area, or some other attribute. 2. Each program can have as many routines as memory allows. One routine must be defined as the main routine and the rest will be subroutines.
Tip "
Default Structure and Names
The names and properties of these components can be modified to suit your application.
Creating a New Task A task triggers the execution of its scheduled programs. The following table outlines the type of tasks that are available: If students are familiar with PLC-5 controllers, relate the periodic task to an STI.
Important: Remind students that periodic and event tasks are only mentioned here as an overview. This topic is presented in more detail in a later lesson.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Task Type
Usage
Continuous
A task that runs continuously but can be interrupted by periodic or event tasks (default task type).
Periodic
A task that executes regularly at a user-specified rate. When called, it will interrupt any lower priority tasks.
Event
A task that is triggered only when a specific event occurs. When called, it will interrupt any lower priority tasks.
Icon
Rev. August 2012 TS2sb56r
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
? If a ControlLogix controller has one continuous task and 4 periodic, how many event tasks could it have? Answer: 27 (27+4+1=32)
? If a DriveLogix controller has zero
2--3
Reference: Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations, 1756--RM094 1. Find the Logix5000 Controller Comparison tables at the front of the manual.
continuous tasks and 4 periodic, how many event tasks could it have?
2. Compare the number of tasks you can have in various controllers.
Answer: 4 (4+4 = 8)
Continuous Task
Compare this to the program files in an RSLogix 5 or 500 project.
A continuous task has the following characteristics: Is a background task that executes any time other operations, such as periodic or event tasks, are not executing
Note that “self-triggered” means that as soon as it ends, the task begins again. It also means that the routine does not have to be called (activated).
Operates in a self-triggered mode (automatically restarts after
If students are familiar with Basic programming, compare this to programming a Goto 10 statement in the last line.
By default, has the lowest priority (one lower than the lowest
each completion) Can be interrupted by a periodic or event task periodic or event task)
Only ONE task can be continuous Watchdog Timers
Note that the watchdog timer in a PLC-5 processor is for the entire controller. Here, the watchdog timer is set for each task.
Tip " Point out that the last scan and max scan can be viewed online. In a different lesson, students will learn to monitor the scan times using ladder logic instructions.
A watchdog timer monitors the execution of a task. The timer is started when a task is initiated and stops when all programs within the task have executed. A watchdog timer continues to run even if a task is interrupted, so it’s important that the watchdog timer is set to a large enough value. Ensure that the time period is longer than the sum of the execution time of all the programs assigned to the task. If the controller detects that a periodic task trigger occurs for a task that is already operating, a minor fault occurs.
If a watchdog timer reaches its configured preset, a major fault occurs. Depending on the controller fault handler, the controller may shut down.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TS2sb56r
2--4
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
To inhibit a task:
Inhibited Task
1. Inhibit all tasks except one.
The following icon in the Controller Organizer indicates that the task has been prevented from executing by a user option or instruction:
2. Run the project and monitor the execution of the active task. 3. When the task meets the requirements of the system, repeat the process, testing a different task.
Inhibited Task
Tip " State that tasks can also be inhibited or uninhibited using SSV instructions.
Mention that for information on equipment phases, attend the PhaseManager course.
This inhibit option can be used to test, diagnose, or start up a project. If a task is inhibited, the controller still pre-scans the task when the controller transitions from Program to Run or Test mode.
Creating a Program A program is the second level of scheduling within a project. A program has the following characteristics: Each task can schedule up to 100 programs.
When a task is triggered, its programs execute in sequence from the first scheduled to the last scheduled.
Programs within a task can access input and output data directly from controller-scoped memory: Code within any program can modify controller-scoped data.
Code within a program can also modify program-scoped data: -- Code within one program cannot access or modify the data that is local to a different program. The Create New Program button is shown in the following graphic: Optional Toolbar Create New Program
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TS2sb56r
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
2--5
Adjusting a Program Schedule Mention that the entire schedule can be viewed in the Task Properties dialog box. Otherwise, programs can be quickly scheduled or unscheduled in the Controller Organizer.
Programs can be scheduled in a specific task or left unscheduled: Original equipment manufacturers may create one project and then schedule or unschedule a program depending on the equipment’s required functionality.
Note that these methods will be demonstrated in the Here’s How section.
Maintenance or field service technicians may create
Add that unscheduled programs do not use any scan time.
troubleshooting programs that are left unscheduled until needed to test a project.
The following example shows a program schedule: Adjust Order
Program Schedule
Unscheduled Programs
Actual Program Scan Time The software can display the maximum scan time and the last scan time in microseconds for a selected program: Scan time is based on the number and type of instructions. These values are execution times for the program and do not include any time spent waiting for other programs or tasks.
State that a Compute instruction will take longer than using simple multiply and divide instructions. Note that the GSV instructions that are used to monitor program time are presented in a different lesson. Tip
Rev. August 2012
These values are for display only.
"
Values can also be monitored using specific instructions in code.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TS2sb56r
2--6
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
Creating a Routine A routine provides the executable code, or decision-making instructions, for a project. Each routine contains a set of elements for a specific programming language: Ladder Logic -- suited for relay or discrete applications Function Block Diagram -- suited for continuous process and drives control applications
Note that ladder logic is the most common language used.
Sequential Function Chart -- suited for motion or batch
applications or concurrent applications where more than one state is active at one time. Also suitable for sequential applications such as assemble or packaging machines. Structured Text -- suited for complex math or array applications or for programs converted from other projects created in high-level languages like C
Tip "
The availability of these languages will depend on the options that have been selected and installed. A routine can be assigned as one of the following types: Main Routine: A routine that executes automatically when the controller triggers the associated task and program:
-- Can be of any language -- Is marked with a 1 in the Controller Organizer Fault Routine: A routine that is configured to execute when the
controller finds an instruction-execution fault within any routines in the associated program: -- Is marked with a yellow triangle in the Controller Organizer Subroutine: A routine that is called by another routine:
-- Is called by a JSR (Jump to Subroutine) instruction in the main routine or another subroutine (conditioned or unconditioned) -- Returns to the other routine when complete or if a condition is met
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TS2sb56r
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
Stress that routines are not listed in the order of execution. JSR instructions determine the order of the subroutine execution.
2--7
The main routine is always listed first, followed by a fault routine (if any), and then all subroutines in alphabetical order:
For troubleshooting, mention that you can create a cross-reference report that lists all JSR instructions that call a subroutine and their locations in the ladder logic. This will be presented in a different lesson.
Main Routine
Ladder Logic Routine
Fault Routine Subroutines
Structured Text Routine Sequential Function Chart Routine
Function Block Diagram Routine
In the graphic point out the “1” on the main routine.
The following is an example of subroutine structure: When the conditions are met, the main routine calls the Level subroutine. Example Ladder Logic in the Main Routine
Subroutine
If necessary, define a nested routine as a subroutine that is activated from within another subroutine. Note that cross-reference reports are part of the Documenting and Searching For Ladder Logic Components lesson.
Rev. August 2012
The Create New Routine button is shown in the following graphic: Optional Toolbar Create New Routine
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TS2sb56r
2--8
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
Program Control Instructions Note that if there are no input parameters, control passes from the JSR instruction to the first rung of the subroutine.
When enabled, the ladder logic JSR instruction directs the logic execution to the specified subroutine and, if needed, passes parameters to the subroutine: Numeric, structured parameters, and BOOL data type tags can be passed. The SBR (Subroutine) instruction receives the input parameters and copies their values into the specified tags: The optional SBR instruction identifies the tags that store the incoming parameters. The RET (Return) instruction ends the subroutine and, if needed, returns parameters to the JSR instruction: -- Use the RET instruction only if you are returning parameters to the JSR instruction.
System Overhead Timeslice Note that the system overhead timeslice is located in the Advanced tab of the Controller Properties dialog box.
Add that because the serial port is in the controller, it affects controller operation. If necessary, review RIUP.
In the graphic, point out that the far right area is used for overhead functions. If there are no functions, the time is available for the continuous task. If there is no continuous task, then the system overhead timeslice is irrelevant. Note that 20% is the default.
The user-configurable system overhead timeslice determines the percentage of controller time that is available for the following background functions: Communicating with programing devices and programming software Messaging
Bridging communications from the controller’s serial port to other devices via the backplane Re-establishing and monitoring I/O connections (RIUP conditions)
The system overhead timeslice percentage does not affect executing periodic or event tasks: Controller Execution Time
Time for Periodic or Event Tasks Time for the Continuous Task % System Overhead Timeslice Percentage
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TS2sb56r
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
Mention in step one that the data is multicast to the backplane then received by the controller. Chalk Talk: If students have a PLC or SLC background, you may want to draw the PLC/SLC scan diagram on the board for comparison. When reviewing the diagram, explain the following steps based on the experience of the class and the lessons already covered: 1. Each rung of ladder logic (code) is scanned.
2--9
Asynchronous Updates Asynchronous: Actions that occur independently of each other and lack a regular pattern. In Logix5000 controllers, I/O values update asynchronously with the execution of code: 1. Input modules multicast their data to the backplane at the RPI rate set in the modules. 2. The code is scanned and the output tags are updated immediately after the execution of each output instruction.
2. As higher numbered rungs are 3. Values are sent to the output modules at the RPI rate and at the scanned, the inputs may change and end of each task. therefore, the outputs may change as reflected in the tag database image. Tip " The automatic output processing that occurs at the end of a task can 3. The RPI is the rate at which the user configures the output modules to update.
be disabled in the properties of the task.
Because of the update process, input devices may change state within one program scan and at a different rate than the program scan:
Single Scan Physical Device Data is received by the input card RPI Rate
Rung 100
COS
Rung 250
Tag is set or cleared in controller
Optional
RPI Rate
Rev. August 2012
Rung 400
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TS2sb56r
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
2--10
Relate the organizational tips to an example compressor assembly project: S
The project has three assembly machine stations in the first controller; therefore, an Assembly task is created.
S
Each station (press, stake, and weld) becomes a program in the Assembly task. Instead of having a separate controller run the machine at each station, one controller runs them all.
S
Each program has a control routine for the machine. A main routine is used to call the control routine (and any future routines).
If available, give examples of naming conventions and how they are constructed.
Give students a few minutes to read the section.
Project Organization Best Practices To efficiently organize a project: Divide the process into functional groups or sections that represent one or more facets of the process:
-- Sequence of related actions that operators perform -- Group of related process events -- Machine or machine sections Divide each program into routines, where each routine represents one or more facets of the program:
-- Specific process within the program -- Section of application code that could be hidden to facilitate troubleshooting -- Function that occurs at several instances during the program -- A main routine that will call up the subroutines of the program Create and apply plant naming conventions for tasks, programs, routines, and tags. Reference: Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations, 1756--RM094 1. Go to the Divide Logic into Tasks, Programs, Routines, and Add--On Instructions chapter. 2. Go to the Decide When to Use Tasks, Programs, and Routines section. 3. Briefly read the information on when to use a task, program, or routine.
Have each student do this on their own. Then go over the answers as a group.
Activity: For each of the situations below, decide if you would separate the logic at the task, program, or routine level. Check the appropriate box:
For this situation
Program
A. A conveyor line uses a series of diverters to sort packages. Each diverter uses identical logic.
Task
B. You only need to update your analog devices every 250 ms, but you must update your discrete devices every 20 ms.
Routine
C. The logic for a conveyor performs these functions: initialize, run, return status information, handle faults.
Task
D. A grinding application monitors an over--current sensor on the feed motor. If the sensor trips, the operation needs to immediately abort to prevent the stone from shattering.
Routine
E. A mixing tank uses a combination of 2--state devices to mix juice:
Separate the logic at this level Task Program Routine
Several valves open and close to add wet and dry ingredients. A single--speed motor mixes the ingredients. An outlet valve opens to drain the tank. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TS2sb56r
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
2--11
Example: Project Organization Note that the organization of this project is not very different from a typical PLC-5 project.
In this example, a paper mill converted a time-tested PLC-5 ladder logic project into an RSLogix 5000 project. All of the logic was placed in one continuous task and follows the basic default project structure:
Single Continuous Task Similar to Traditional Controller Project
Select tool windows can now be docked in RSLogix 5000’s main window, float on top of the window, or become an Auto Hide tool window. This applies to:
Program Main Routine
S S S S S
Subroutines
Controller Organizer Errors Search results Watch Start page
Verifying Tasks, Programs, and Routines Mention that the verification process is similar to the RSLogix 5 and 500 process with the addition of tag verification.
After organizing your controller project, you can verify it. In this process, the software looks for errors such as unassigned routines. The following buttons are available to verify the entire controller project or routine: Standard Toolbar
Verify Open Routine
Rev. August 2012
Verify Controller
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TS2sb56r
2--12
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
Errors or warnings found in the verification process are displayed in the Output window: Double-Click to Go to the Error or Warning or Press F4
Here’s How IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate Tip all lesson objectives using the proper job aids.
To access video-based help files: Follow along as your instructor demonstrates this procedure.
"
There are many video-based help files to assist in everything from development of an RSLogix 5000 project to maintaining one.
Use the steps below to help guide you during the demonstration: Access the files through the Help menu’s Learning Center “How Do I” section. Show one or two examples of the video help. You can stop them after a few moments. This is just to show how the system works. If Lesson 20 will be used, skip this Here’s How.
Example
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Access the files through the Help menu’s Learning Center “How Do I” section:
Rev. August 2012 TS2sb56r
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
2--13
For example, under Controller Projects you would find subjects on creating and downloading projects. Under Maintain you would find information on clearing faults or searching.
Here’s How
To perform the following tasks: Create a new RSLogix 5000 project file
Modify controller properties Create a program and routine Adjust a program schedule Copy and reuse programs and routines Delete a routine, program, and task Verify tasks, programs, and routines
Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the steps below to help guide you during the demonstration: Create a new RSLogix 5000 project. When demonstrating the listed procedures, point out the following items:
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
Revision must match the major firmware revision of the controller
S
The MainTask, MainProgram, and MainRoutine
-
Initial name of the project file
S
The Main Routine Assignment drop-down list
-
What happens if you change the name of the controller or the name of the project file
S
The max scan time
-
Which name shows up in RSWho
S
The System Overhead Timeslice option
-
Once you pick the firmware revision for a project, you cannot change it to a lower revision
-
Task, program, and routine hierarchy
-
Where you assign a main routine for a program
-
How to see the maximum scan time of a task
-
Where you change the system overhead timeslice value
" The copying and reusing programs and routines procedure is part of the “Copying and Reusing Project Components” procedure in the Procedures Guide.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TS2sb56r
2--14
Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TS2sb56r
Exercise: Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
2--15
Exercise: Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice creating and organizing a new RSLogix 5000 project. Context: You are familiar with the system’s hardware and software components. You are now ready to create a new RSLogix 5000 project file to hold your programming and configuration information. You are also ready to organize the project and direct the execution of the code. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. From the Help Menu open the Learning Center: A. Select the How Do I tab. B. Select Controller Projects. C. View the Video “Create a New Project.” D. Remember as you go through the additional lab and steps that the Help system is there to assist you in your work. 2. Create a new RSLogix 5000 project file for the controller in slot 1 of your workstation. Give it this name: Paint. 3. Modify the following controller properties: A. For an anticipated increase in communications, change the system overhead timeslice to 25%. 4. Rename the Main Task as Paint.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TS2e56r
2--16
Exercise: Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
5. Create the following programs and routines: Task Paint (This task automatically restarts when it is done.) The watchdog timer value must be 600 ms.
Programs
Routines
Purpose
Paint_line_1 (Rename the MainProgram)
MainRoutine
Ladder that enables the subroutine
Paint_Control
Ladder that controls the paint gun
MainRoutine
Ladder that enables the subroutine
Paint_Control
Ladder that controls the paint gun
MainRoutine
Ladder that enables the subroutine
Paint_Control
Ladder that controls the paint gun
Paint_line_2
Paint_line_3
6. Copy the Paint_line_3 program (with all of its contents). 7. Paste the copied program into the Paint task and change its name to Paint_line_4. 8. Adjust the program schedule in the Paint task so that the programs execute in this order: A. Paint_line_3 B. Paint_line_1 C. Paint_line_2 D. Paint_line_4 9. Delete the Paint_line_4 program (and all of its contents).
Tip "
Remember that all elements must be unassigned and removed first. 10. Verify the tasks, programs, and routines and correct any errors. 11. Save the project file.
Tip "
Another programmer was assigned to create and organize the project for the controller in slot 3 for a quality check. Although this is not the paint line, you still want to follow the same style and conventions for easy troubleshooting. 12. Open the TS2_1756r_A1.acd file. 13. Examine all properties of the tasks (continuous and periodic), programs, and routines programmed in the project.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TS2e56r
Exercise: Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
2--17
14. Which task is periodic?
15. Which task is continuous?
16. In which order do the programs in the continuous task execute?
17. What are the subroutines in the Station_4_Quality program?
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TS2e56r
2--18
Exercise: Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
Answers
Exercise A 3. A. The System Overhead Time Slice is configured on the Advanced tab of the Controller Properties dialog box. 5. The main routine for a program is assigned on the Configuration tab of the program properties dialog box:
7. The tasks, programs, and routines entered in the Paint project are shown in the following graphic:
Watchdog Timer Set to 600 ms
Assigned as Paint_line_3 Main Routine
Assigned as Paint_line_1 Main Routine
Assigned as Paint_line_2 Main Routine
Assigned as Paint_line_4 Main Routine
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TS2e56r
Exercise: Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
2--19
9. To delete the Paint_Line_4 program, you must perform the following actions: A. Unassign MainRoutine as the main routine. B. Delete the MainRoutine and the Paint_Control routines. C. Unschedule the program. D. Delete the program. 14. Record_Shift_Number, identified by the clock icon, is the periodic task:
15. Assembly, identified by the round arrow icon, is the continuous task.
16. The programs in the continuous task execute in this order: A. Common B. Station_4_Quality C. Station_5_Palletize 17. The Station_4_Quality program contains the following subroutines:
Check Data_Logging Reject
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TS2e56r
2--20
Exercise: Creating and Organizing a New RSLogix 5000 Project
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TS2e56r
Lesson
3
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Determine the period (rate) for a periodic task Create a periodic task
When You Will Do This If you have logic you want to run at a specific time period, create a period task for it.
Before You Begin
Task Type Review A task triggers the execution of its scheduled programs. The following table outlines the type of tasks that are available:
If students are familiar with PLC-5 or SLC 500 controllers, relate the periodic task to an STI (Selectable Timed Interrupt).
Rev. August 2012
Task Type
Usage
Continuous
A task that runs continuously but can be interrupted by periodic or event tasks.
Periodic
A task that executes regularly at a user-specified rate. When called, it will interrupt any lower priority tasks.
Event
A task that is triggered only when a specific event occurs. When called, it will interrupt any lower priority tasks.
Icon
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PERsb56r
3--2
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Periodic Task Add that a task that is 8 ms in duration and is executed every 8 ms will block all other tasks of lower priority from executing.
Fault Example: If a periodic task executes every 8 ms and it is 11 ms in duration, the controller will fault.
Tip "
A periodic task has the following characteristics: Is triggered by the controller at a regular, repeated time interval determined by the user
Always interrupts and suspends the continuous task May interrupt other periodic or event tasks with a lower priority
level: -- An interrupted task does not shift its start time. -- An interrupted task will stop mid-instruction. When executing, scans all assigned programs once from top to bottom After a single scan, an output update is triggered and controller is returned to the interrupted task at the point it was interrupted Like a continuous or event task, periodic tasks require at least one program and one routine. Example: Periodic Task Use Periodic tasks are selected for processes that require accurate and deterministic execution: Check pressure on a machine at regular intervals Correct a PID loop at regular intervals
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PERsb56r
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
3--3
Example: Project Organization Note that this project takes advantage of some of the Logix5000 organizational elements.
In this example, the motion application includes two periodic tasks to ensure execution at specific time intervals:
Periodic Task (with Times in Names)
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PERsb56r
3--4
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Periodic Task Properties The user--defined properties for each periodic task determine when the task is executed: In the graphic, point out that the period is “when the task starts” and not how long it takes. Start Interval Priority Level
Important Priority Information
Period The period determines the start interval for the task: The trigger time range is 1 ms (millisecond) to 2000 seconds.
The default is 10 ms. If a periodic task retriggers before the task is done, a minor fault will occur.
The rate at which a periodic task is triggered determines the period in which the logic is executed and the data is manipulated within the task. Data outputs established by the programs in a task retain their values until the next execution of the task or until they are manipulated by another task.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PERsb56r
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
3--5
Priority Each periodic and event task in a controller has a priority level that determines which task executes when multiple tasks are triggered: Priorities are assigned by the user.
Clarify that the lower number (1) gives the task a higher priority or importance.
There are 15 levels of priority, with 1 being the highest priority
and 15 being the lowest: -- A task with a higher priority will execute first (i.e., 1 before 3)
Note that the fastest or shortest task will not necessarily be the highest priority.
Task priorities are relative: -- If there are only three tasks, priorities of 6, 7, and 8 will
Clarify that this means the continuous task automatically has the lowest priority. A user cannot configure the priority for a continuous task.
function the same as priorities of 1, 2, and 3. Although no priority level is assigned, the motion task is always the highest priority. Although no priority level is assigned, the continuous task is always one priority level lower than all other tasks.
Highest Priority
Motion Task Trend
Point out that periodic and event tasks use the same priority scale/levels. Therefore, whichever task has the highest priority executes first, regardless of the task type.
Event or Periodic Task - Priority 1 . . . Event or Periodic Task - Priority 5 . . . Event or Periodic Task - Priority 10 . . . Event or Periodic Task - Priority 15 . . . Lowest Priority
Rev. August 2012
Continuous Task
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PERsb56r
3--6
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Scan Time Values Note that this system creates slightly more overhead, as the controller writes the I/O updates after each rung is scanned and does not wait until all of the rungs are scanned.
When executing, the software displays the maximum scan time and the last scan time in microseconds for the selected task in the Task Properties dialog box:
Online Properties Length of Execution
Periodic Task Execution The period and the priority assigned to each task determine the task execution. Execution time is based on: The amount of code in a project The complexity of the code
Processor speed Example: Periodic Task In the graphic, point out that the rate is “when the task starts” and not how long it takes.
Task Execution Every 20 ms
In the following example, the periodic task is triggered every 20 ms: 5 ms
0 ms
20 ms
40 ms
60 ms
80 ms
Task (Duration of 5 ms)
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PERsb56r
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
3--7
Example: Periodic Task and Continuous Task The following example shows how the periodic task interrupts and suspends the continuous task: Periodic Task Execution Every 20 ms 5 ms Continuous Task 0 ms
60 ms
40 ms
20 ms
80 ms
Continuous Task Interrupted for 5 ms
Example: Multiple Tasks The following example shows how a periodic task interrupts and suspends the continuous task and another periodic task: Task A is triggered every 20 ms and has a priority of 3. Task B is triggered every 22 ms and has a priority of 1. Therefore, task B will interrupt task A: 22 ms
Task B (Every 22 ms) Priority 1 Task A (Every 20 ms) Priority 3
44 ms
66 ms
88 ms
Continuous Task 0 ms
20 ms
60 ms
40 ms
80 ms
? How many periodic or event tasks
Two tasks can be assigned the same priority. If this occurs, the tasks will timeslice, or alternate execution, in 1 ms intervals.
Answer: There can be up to 32 periodic or event tasks (or 31 if there is a continuous task). However, there are only 15 levels of priority. (Use this difference to lead into the discussion on timeslicing).
Example: Equal Priorities (Timeslicing)
and how many levels of priority can there be in a ControlLogix project?
The following example shows how two tasks of equal priority will timeslice: Task A, Priority 3 Task B, also Priority 3
0 ms
Rev. August 2012
Tip "
1 ms 2 ms 3 ms
4 ms 5 ms
Timeslicing takes slightly more time than having different priorities. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PERsb56r
3--8
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Here’s How
To determine the period (rate) for a periodic task. 1. Note the watchdog timer value. 2. Subtract the required time for the continuous task. 3. Subtract the time of any existing periodic tasks. 4. Divide the time remaining by the time it takes the new periodic task to execute. 5. Divide the total time allowed by the number of times you want the second task to execute.
Example
Determining the Period (Rate) for a Periodic Task. 1. Note the watchdog timer value: 450 ms. 2. Subtract the required time for the continuous task: 450--300 = 150. 3. Subtract the time the existing periodic task takes: 150--90=60 90 ms comes from the following calculation: Executes every 50 ms, or 9 times in 450 ms. 9 times executed * 10 ms each time = 90 ms. 4. Divide the time remaining by the time it takes the second periodic task to execute: 60 / 20 = 3 5. Divide the total time allowed by the number of times you want the second task to execute: 450 / 3 = 150
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PERsb56r
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Here’s How
3--9
To create a periodic task. Activity: As your instructor demonstrates this procedure, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the CCP143_1756r_DEM2.acd project. When demonstrating the task, point out the following items: S
S
The routines within one periodic task enables the slot 0 outputs while the other disables them
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedure in the job aid
-
Period and priority of the task
-
Max scan time (when online)
In Run mode, you can verify when the task execute by the lights on the workstation
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PERsb56r
3--10
Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PERsb56r
Exercise: Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
3--11
Exercise: Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice creating and configuring a periodic task in an RSLogix 5000 project. Context: You have already created an RSLogix 5000 project file to hold your programming and configuration information. You are ready to add a task that will execute on a regular basis. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. What type of application would require a periodic task?
2. Open the PER_1756r_A1.acd file. 3. Review the following information about your project: Existing periodic task at priority 2. Takes about 20 ms and executes every 50 ms. Main task takes about 300 ms.
4. You want your new periodic task to have a higher priority than the Existing_Periodic task. What priority number will you assign for your task based on the previous information?
5. If your new periodic task was assigned the same priority as Existing_Periodic task, what would happen if the tasks attempted to execute simultaneously?
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PERe56r
3--12
Exercise: Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
6. Review the following application requirements:
Your goal is to execute the new task every 150 ms. The new task must have a higher priority than Existing_Periodic task.
7. Create a periodic task named Quality configured for the priority and rate necessary to meet the application requirements. 8. Add the unscheduled program Quality_Monitor to the program schedule of your new periodic task. 9. Download your project to the controller and go online. 10. Place the controller in Run or Remote Run mode. 11. What happens when the controller is placed in Run or Remote Run mode?
12. If the controller experiences a watchdog fault while in Run or Remote Run modes, how could the configuration of the periodic task be changed to prevent this fault?
13. Clear the Major Fault from the Controller Properties dialog box. 14. Configure the Quality task to have a rate of 250 ms. 15. Place the controller in Run or Remote Run mode. 16. In the Task Properties window for the Main Task, verify that the maximum scan time is not greater than the watchdog of 500ms.
How Did You Do?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Turn to the Answers section.
Rev. August 2012 PERe56r
Exercise: Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Rev. August 2012
3--13
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PERe56r
3--14
Exercise: Creating a Periodic Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Answers
Exercise A 1. Any type of application that requires accurate and deterministic control would be an appropriate response. 4. The only priority higher than 2 is 1. 5. If periodic tasks of the same priority attempt to execute simultaneously, the tasks will timeslice execution in 1 ms intervals. 7. Your New Task dialog box should look similar to the following example:
11. Your controller should experience a major fault when the controller is placed in Run or Remote mode. This is due to the Main Task watchdog time expiring. 12. Increasing the period (rate) of the periodic task will reduce the frequency the periodic task executes. Even a periodic task with contains little code can fault a watchdog timer if executed frequently enough. Another option would be to increase the watchdog timer for the continuous task. 16. Your Task Properties window should look similar to the following example (scan times will vary):
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PERe56r
Lesson
4
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Create a tag Define an alias tag
Create an array of tags Verify tags Monitor and edit data When You Will Do This As you develop your logic, you will have to define tags, aliases, and arrays to efficiently store your data.
Before You Begin
Controller Memory Traditional controllers have data files, such as Timer or Integer, where groups of the same types of data are stored together.
For example, a PLC-5 processor has a pre-created timer file, where all timers are stored together.
There are no such pre-defined data files in a Logix5000 controller. Users must define the memory in a Logix5000 controller by creating tags. Tag: An area of controller memory where data from devices, calculations, faults, etc. is stored. Each area is given a unique name:
Verify that students have an understanding of bit, byte, and word lengths. If not, spend some time reviewing these terms: S
Bit: The smallest unit of data represented by the digits 0 and 1.
S
Byte: A string of 8 bits operated on as one unit.
S
Word: A unit of memory in a controller composed of 16 individual bits or two bytes that are treated as one unit.
“Drive_Speed” Data Controller Memory
Remind students that the individual bits of a byte or word can also be monitored or addressed.
“Start” Data
“Sensor” Data
Emphasize that the graphic depicts only a portion of the controller memory. Note that in the graphic each line represents a bit, or the smallest unit of memory.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2sb56r
4--2
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Data Types Add that the data type maps out the data just as it does in a PLC-5, SLC 500, or other processor.
Data Type: The definition of how many bits, bytes, or words of data a tag will use. The data type is based on the source of the information.
Note that a tag is similar to the symbolic address in a PLC-5 or SLC 500 controller. The main difference is that tags are stored in the controller, where symbols are stored in the computer only.
Pre-Defined Data Types: Commonly used memory sizes or structures that are already defined in the software.
Indicate that BOOL, SINT, INT DINT, and REAL data types are called atomic data types.
Note that the DINT data type is the main data type. More details will be presented later in the lesson.
Atomic Data Type: A simple data type made of one piece of data: Data Type
Definition
BOOL
A single bit where 1 = on and 0 = off (e.g., the state of a discrete device such as a pushbutton or sensor)
SINT
A short integer (8 bits) between --128 and +127
INT
An integer or word (16 bits) between --32,768 and +32,767 (e.g., PLC-5r data)
DINT
A double integer (32 bits), used to store a base integer number in the range of --2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 (e.g., serial number)
LINT
A 64-bit signed integer data type used to represent wall clock time
REAL
A 32-bit floating point value (e.g., an analog value such as a potentiometer value)
STRING
A data type that holds character data (e.g., “Car” or “this is text”.
Using these definitions, tags for the given devices require the following data types:
Controller Memory
“Drive_Speed” Data DINT, or 32 Bits
“Start” Data BOOL, or 1 Bit
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
“Sensor” Data BOOL, or 1 Bit
Rev. August 2012 TA2sb56r
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
4--3
Structure: A more complex data type that is made up of several pieces of data. E.g., a TIMER data type is made up of a combination of DINTs and BOOLs:
Relate this to a timer relay where there is on/off data as well as a preset value.
Tip "
Give an example, such as the TOTALIZER data type, which is used with the TOTALIZER function block. The data type contains a member for each parameter of the function block.
Data Type
Definition
COUNTER
Increasing or decreasing total
TIMER
Increasing time total (milliseconds)
CONTROL
Length and position for file level instructions
MESSAGE
Control structure for a message instruction
There are other less common, pre-defined data types that are used to store specific data for function block instructions or motion instructions. Module Defined Data Types: Data types used for hardware data, such as I/O tags.
Memory Allocation The minimum memory allocation for a tag of any type is a DINT (double integer or 32 bits). A DINT is the main Logix5000 data type.
Add that a DINT is often called a D word or a double word.
When data is assigned by the user, the controller assigns the next available DINT(s) of memory to any data type. When data types such as BOOL, SINT, and INT are assigned to a tag, the controller still consumes a full DINT (four bytes) but only fills part of it:
Use the graphic to review the definitions of BOOL, SINT, INT, DINT, and REAL. After describing each data type, point out the unused area.
Minimum Memory Allocation of 1 DINT 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Unused Memory
BOOL
Rev. August 2012
SINT INT
Data Type
Used Memory
DINT REAL
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2sb56r
4--4
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Add that students will learn how to create these components in the next lesson.
To efficiently use memory for BOOLs, SINTs, or INTs, an array or a user-defined data type should be created.
A controller stores tags as they are created and as they fit into controller memory.
Tags of the same data type are not necessarily stored together in memory.
Tag Scope Add that for program-scoped tags, behind the scenes, the program name becomes a prefix for each tag name. This is how tags with the same names in different programs are kept separate.
Mention that if tags are correctly scoped, ladder logic that uses the program tags can be reused in different programs without changing tag names. Note that the I/O tags listed in the table are the tags that are automatically created when a module is configured. This does not refer to any alias tags that might be created. Mention that the scope dictates the tags folder in which you will create the tag.
Tags can be created at two different scopes: Controller-Scoped: Tags, such as I/O tags, that are available to every task and program within a project. Program-Scoped: Tags that are only available to the program to which they are associated. Scope requirements for specific tags are outlined in the following table: To use a tag . . .
In more than one program within the project To produce or consume data (share it with other controllers)
Controller-scoped
In a message instruction or with a PanelViewt 1000C terminal In only one program (and it is not a message instruction or a produced or consumed tag)
Note that tags can be defined through a dialog box or through the Edit Tags worksheet. The worksheet may be faster when creating multiple tags.
Creating a Tag
Direct students to the “Description” entry in the Glossary of the Procedures Guide for the description rules.
Style Data Access Control (optional) Description (optional)
Note that alias tags will be presented later in this lesson.
Then select this scope . . .
That is generated when an I/O module is configured (I/O status, data, etc.)
Program-scoped
To create a tag, the following parameters must be defined: Tag Name Data Type
Note that the Monitor Tags tab is for viewing data that is active in the controller. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TA2sb56r
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
4--5
The parameters are defined in the Edit Tags tab of the Tags window:
Tag
Filter
Another Name for the Tag
Operand Descriptions Data Type
Wildcard Filter
Data Access Control
Display Style
Icon Indicating Controller-Scoped Tags
White = Editable Field Editing View
State that tag names are not case-sensitive. However, case may help with readability.
Tag Name
Tip "
Have the students turn to the Glossary of the procedures guide. Review the naming conventions.
Naming conventions are listed in the “Name” entry in the Glossary of the Procedures Guide. Creating controller-scoped tags and program-scoped tags with the same names can cause confusion.
Note that these naming conventions apply to most components in an RSLogix 5000 project.
Data Type Tags can be created using the following data types: Any pre-defined data type
Any user-defined data type Style State that data from a BCD thumbwheel could be viewed in the hexadecimal radix.
Style is the display radix for each data type: For certain data types, the style can be changed to a different display radix. E.g., the default style for a tag of the DINT data type is decimal:
-- The style for DINT tags can be changed to binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2sb56r
4--6
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Defining an Alias Tag Alias Tag: An additional name for a tag (or other alias tag): The tags refer to the same area of memory. Tell students that if a base tag is used as an address, any corresponding alias tags will not be displayed. State that if the base tag is used directly in an instruction, that is all that is shown. Compare this to calling someone by their name instead of their employee number, or referring to a Tip module by a name instead of a part number.
"
The tags, therefore, reflect the same values and changes. Base Tag: The tag to which the alias refers (i.e., the tag where data is actually stored). If an alias tag is used as the address for an instruction, the alias tag is always displayed. When programming, it may be confusing to sometimes use an alias tag and other times directly use the tag to which the alias refers.
In the following graphic, trace the chain Alias tags are commonly used to rename I/O tags that are generated of alias tags, beginning with Start. When with complex naming structures: you reach Alias_4, it will be easier to explain Base tags. Alias Tag Name What the Tag is an Alias for (e.g., an I/O Tag) If this lesson is part of a standard school, state that students will learn how to configure I/O modules and interpret the generated I/O tags in the Communicating with a Local 1756 I/O Module lesson. Base or Original Tag (If There is a Chain of Alias Tags)
Note that the hierarchy of alias tags is available in the cross--reference report for a tag. This can be a very helpful troubleshooting tool.
Use caution in developing applications that utilize multiple alias tags for the same base tag.
You cannot create a program-scoped alias tag for a controller-scoped tag of the same name.
Note that there is a separate lesson that presents the steps for these tasks. If students are familiar with producing and consuming tags, point out that the setup in RSLogix 5000 software is the same. For Ethernet, the producing controller is connected to a remote 1756-ENET or 1756-ENBT module.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Produced and Consumed Tags The following controller-scoped tags can be created to share data between controllers: Produced Tag: A tag that is shared with other controllers over the backplane or a control network, such as ControlNett or EtherNet/IPt. Consumed Tag: A tag that holds the value of a produced tag that is received from another controller over the backplane or a control network. Rev. August 2012 TA2sb56r
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
4--7
Creating an Array of Tags Note that an array that is a member of user-defined data type can only have one dimension.
Array: A numerically indexed sequence of elements of the same data type. An array tag occupies a contiguous section of memory in the controller with each element in sequence. Arrays can have one, two, or three dimensions. Element: A single position within an array.
Note that the array Part[40] will have elements of Part[0] to Part[39]. Point out that you can create an alias tag for each element of an array. For example, Cold_Timer might be an alias for TIMER [34].
Example: Array To make INT records for 6 parts, a one-dimensional array of INTs is created: 1 DINT (32 Bits)
Relate this to PLC-5 data, where N7:0 to N7:9 is a one-dimensional array of integer data types.
1 INT
Note that if maintenance personnel who will work on the project are used to working with PLC-5 controllers, you can create an array named T4. Each element, e.g., T4[11], will look similar to a PLC-5 timer, with brackets instead of a colon.
Point out that if you create an array tag from the Tags Editor window, and manually enter the brackets and numbers, the first value entered in the brackets becomes the X value. The second number entered is Y and the third is Z. Note that if you enter the dimensions from the Tags Properties window Dim0 becomes Z if you create a three dimensional array. Depending on how the tag is created you could end up with two different results.
? What is a structure? Answer: A data type made up of a mixture of other data types, such as a timer (with a mix of DINTS and BOOLS).
Rev. August 2012
Part_Data[1]
Part_Data[0]
Part_Data[3] Part_Data[5]
Part_Data[2] Part_Data[4]
The elements in the array occupy memory in order. The array always starts at 0 and extends to the number of elements minus 1. An array in the Tags window is shown in the following graphic: Array of 6 (0- 5) INTs
Same Data Type
Single Element
An array must be created with the following rules in mind: An array can have up to three dimensions unless it is a part of a UDT, where then it can have only one dimension. An array can be of one data type only. Arrays support the following data types: -- Any pre-defined data types except Axis data types, Message, or Motion_Group -- A user-defined data type E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2sb56r
4--8
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Tip "
Data of the same type is not automatically grouped in memory. To store all timers together, create an array of timer tags.
Array Storage Relate this to a Microsoft Excel worksheet where one dimension is a column, two dimensions are rows and columns (a standard worksheet), and three dimensions are several pages of rows and columns. One Dimension
Arrays can have up to three dimensions and store data in the following manner: Two Dimensions
Three Dimensions
Example: Three Dimensional Array Add that an array might include data sorted by shift number, part type, and part number. Note that data might also be stored by shift, day, and week. Or, x and y coordinates (for retrieving a part in storage).
A three dimensional array might store the following data: Part Number
Part Number, Size
Part Number, Size, Color
Note that each square is an element. Note that in memory, the first dimension will not increment until the second dimension reaches its upper limit.
= Part Number 2, Size 3, Color 0
Ask students to determine the total number of elements in each of the part number arrays.
Tip "
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
To determine the total number of elements in an array, multiply the number of elements in each dimension. A tag uses a DINT (32 bits) even if it is smaller (8 bits). To conserve data, put 32 BOOLs, four SINTs, or two INTs into an array.
Rev. August 2012 TA2sb56r
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
4--9
Array Addressing Note that this section presents the formats for array addresses. Entering the addresses will be presented in the Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project lesson.
In an array, the following can be addressed: A numeric element (fixed)
A variable element A numeric bit A variable bit Numeric Element Addressing
Note that the number or expression in the brackets is the subscript. Point out the square brackets that enclose the element number. Remind students that the elements begin with 0 (zero).
To access a specific array element (e.g., one DINT in an array of DINTs), use the following address format:
Note that the subscript is the value or expression in the square brackets.
Example: Numeric Element Addressing
Tip "
ArrayName[Element Number]
PartData[3] This reference is fixed because the element value of 3 will not change. Data that is stored in two- and three-dimensional arrays can be addressed using the same format. Additional dimensions are separated by commas, as outlined in the following table: Number of Dimensions
Format
Example
1
Array_name[0]
Part[3]
2
Array_name[1, 0]
Part[2,4]
3
Array_name[2, 1, 0]
Part[3,5,1]
Example: Numeric Element Addressing for Multiple Dimensions Array= Part[8]
Part[8,6]
Part[8,6,4]
Part[4,5,2]
Part[2]
Rev. August 2012
Part[1,3]
Part[2,3,0]
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2sb56r
4--10
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Variable Element Addressing Add that this is similar to indirect addressing in PLC-5 programming.
To change the array element that your logic references, use a tag or expression to point to the element, using the following address format: ArrayName[Tag or Expression] Example: Variable Element Addressing Part[SerialNumber] Part[SerialNumber*5]
In the last example, add that if position1= 7, and position2 = 3, then the part value is 4.
Part[Position1--Position2] You can use the following mathematical operators in an expression to specify an array element: Operator
Description
+
Add
--
Subtract/Negate
*
Multiply
/
Divide
And
And
Frd
BCD to integer
Not
Complement
Or
Or
Tod
Integer to BCD
Sqr
Square root
Xor
Exclusive or
As an example, state that if Position1--Position2=48 and the array is an array of only 40, a major fault will occur.
Any array value that you enter must be within the boundaries of the specified array. Instructions that view arrays as a collection of elements generate a major fault if a value exceeds its corresponding dimension. Numeric Bit Addressing
State that the delimiter before the bit is a period.
A bit within one element of an array can be addressed using the following address format: ArrayName[Element Number].Bit
Note that the example addresses the second bit in tag element 1 of the part array.
Example: Numeric Bit Addressing Part[1].2 Mix_Timer[5].DN
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TA2sb56r
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
4--11
Variable Bit Addressing To dynamically change the value of a bit, use the following address format: ArrayName[Element Number].[Tag or Expression] Example: Variable Bit Addressing Part[SerialNumber].[Position1--Position2] Array Addressing Summary Point out that a period signifies a bit or a member. A tag without a period is the whole address.
The following table presents a summary of the array address types, formats, and examples: Type
Format
Example
Numeric element
ArrayName[Element Number]
Part[5]
Variable element
ArrayName[Tag]
Station[Position]
ArrayName[Expression]
Station[Position+5]
Numeric bit
ArrayName[Element].Bit
Part[5].15
Variable bit
ArrayName[Element Number].[Tag] ArrayName[Element Number].[Expression]
Part[Index].[MyIndex] Part[Index].[MyIndex+31]
Verifying Tags Mention that the verification process is similar to the RSLogix 5 and 500 process with the addition of tag verification.
After tags are entered, they can be verified. In this process, the software looks for tag errors. Errors found in the verification process are displayed in the Output window:
Double-click to Go to the Error or Press F4
In the Tag window, tags with errors are also marked with an
State that BOOL data types can now be toggled in the Monitor tags window (right-click the tag value or press [CTRL]+T).
Rev. August 2012
.
Monitoring and Editing Data Tags values can be monitored and edited online through the Tags window or certain instructions.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2sb56r
4--12
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Point out the various unlabeled elements of the spreadsheet, including the rows, cells, columns, etc. Mention that operand descriptions will appear with the tag in logic if configured to do so. Right- Click to Hide/Show Columns
Monitor Tags Tab The Monitor Tags tab is a direct view of a controller’s memory: Scope of Current Collection
Tag and Members
Data Type Blue Operand Descriptions Arrow (up to 512 characters)
Value in Controller Expand to See Structure Members or Bits within the Tag Monitoring View
A blue arrow at the top of a column signifies that a change to any value in this column will immediately take effect in the controller when you press Enter or click another cell.
Stress that finding tags is a key step in monitoring. The way in which tags are filtered can help limit the number of tags displayed. If used improperly, it can also hide required tags.
Tags and Members Tags of the same data type are not automatically displayed together in the Monitor Tags tab: Tags can be displayed alphabetically (default mode). Tags can be sorted and filtered (e.g., show DINT tags only).
Tags can be filtered with wildcards (filtered based on their name
or description in addition to their scope, type, and classification). Tags that are structures (TIMER, etc.) can be expanded to display members. Display Style State that data from a BCD thumbwheel could be viewed in the hexadecimal style.
The Style parameter controls how data is displayed for certain tags. Example: The default style for a tag of the INT data type is decimal. This can be changed to binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal.
Tip " E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Style is for display only; it does not affect how data is stored in the controller. Rev. August 2012 TA2sb56r
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
4--13
When online, only the tag name, style, and description can be changed.
From the Tag Properties View window you can monitor a tag’s properties, document, toggle values or Force. The Window can also be docked, or set to auto hide, using the Auto Hide button located in the banner: Tag Properties View Window
Docked or Auto Hide Button Tag Information
Tag Value and Force Mask
Stress the difference between editing the tag (e.g., tag name) and changing the tag data, such as the preset. In this ladder logic example, point out that values can be monitored and certain values, such as timer presets, can be edited.
Monitoring and Editing Tag Values through a Routine Tag values can be monitored and sometimes edited online through instructions in routines: Example: Ladder Logic Routine Tag values can be monitored through the corresponding parameters of an instruction:
Blue Arrow: Change will Immediately Take Effect in the Controller
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2sb56r
4--14
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Example: Function Block Diagram Routine Note that only the parameters with a checkmark in the Vis column (Visibility) are displayed on the function block.
Visible function block parameters can be monitored through the instructions. Others can be monitored through the Properties dialog box:
Parameter Names
Parameter Values
Parameter Data Types
Parameter Description (Up to 128 Characters)
Visibility Enabled
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TA2sb56r
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Note that the Watch tab is accessed from the View menu.
4--15
Monitoring and Editing Tag Values in the Watch Tab The Watch tab displays all tags referenced by an active routine of any type. Values can be monitored or edited:
Refresh Structured Text Data
Changing Values
Force
Create a Custom Monitor
Tag Scope
Because structured text values cannot be monitored in the programming language, the Watch tab is extremely useful when monitoring a structured text routine online.
? Who has used Custom Data
Monitors in RSLogix 500 software?
The Watch tab does not update as you make edits to a structured text routine. It is updated when you verify the routine.
Quick Watch Tag Monitor Note that the custom list of tags allows you to see only select tags while viewing code. This helps you avoid the searching and scrolling necessary with the Tags monitor.
Rev. August 2012
The Quick Watch Tag Monitor allows you to assemble a custom list of tags to monitor: Tags from the controller-scope
Tags from the open routine
Tip "
You can drag tags from the open routine editor to the Quick Watch Tag Monitor.
Tip "
The tags are maintained in the monitor only while the project is open.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2sb56r
4--16
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Persistent Quick Watch Features of Persistent Quick Watch include: Enables creation of named tag groups (Quick Watch Lists) -- Tags can be added via drag-and-drop from routine(s), from tag editor/monitor or manually selected via tag browser Improves ease-of-use and simplifies maintenance Lists can be easily selected for debugging purposes during integration or operation and are persistent within the RSLogix 5000 project:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TA2sb56r
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Here’s How
4--17
To perform the following tasks: Create a tag Define an alias tag
Create an array of tags Verify tags Monitor and edit data Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the CCP143_1756r_DEM2.acd project.
Monitoring data in RSLinx isn’t an objective of the lesson but it is useful for the exercise and student. Note that an RSLinx Classic activation file is required to access the data table monitor.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
Using array dimensions text boxes
-
Structure of a created array (in the Monitor Tags list)
-
Show and Toggle Columns options in the Edit Tags windows
-
Using grid to pick a bit
Monitor Data in RSLinx Classic Professional Software Tags can also be monitored (but not edited) in RSLinx Classic Professional software.
Read-Only Values
Your Turn Rev. August 2012
Now it’s your turn. Do Exercise A and return here when you’re done. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2sb56r
4--18
Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Data Access Control
Mention that External Access Control does not apply to Module Defined tags or aliases to them.
The data access properties of a tag is used to control how people and programs access the tag at run-time: Use External Access to control how an external application, such as an HMI, historian, or OPC data server, can access a tag: -- Arrays -- Top level only; UDTs -- by member -- Possible values are: -- Read/Write: External applications can both read and modify the tag’s value -- Read Only: External applications can read the tag’s value, but not modify it -- None: External applications can neither read nor write the tag’s value Use Constant to control how controller logic can access a tag: -- When this attribute is set, the tag’s value cannot be changed programmatically Data Access Control Selections are shown in the following graphic:
Tags Window
Data Access Control Selections User-Defined Data Type
Mention that if a tag’s external access is set to None, the tag will not show up in other application browsers. Note that if a tag is set to Constant and a program instruction tries to write a value to the tag, this would appear as an error when verifying the project.
Your Turn E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Data Access Control Benefits These options give you a way to protect data from being accidentally or intentionally written to. They can also speed-up HMI creation by reducing the number of tags that are visible while browsing the controller from the HMI development environment. Now it’s your turn. Do Exercise B.
Rev. August 2012 TA2sb56r
Exercise: Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
4--19
Exercise: Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice the following tasks: Creating a tag Defining an alias tag
Creating an array of tags Verifying tags Monitoring and editing data Context: Sample code to test your production line has been developed. This code was written before your hardware installation. The hard-wired addresses were not known when the code was created. You now need to create base and alias tags and an array of tags so that the code will function properly. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the TA2_1756r_A1.acd file. 2. Review your project and verify the tags referenced in the MainRoutine of the Line_1 program have not been created. 3. Create a new tag with the following properties: Name: Stop_Motor Type: Base Data Type: BOOL Scope: Program (Line_1) 4. Create a new alias tag with the following properties: Name: Start_Motor Type: Alias Alias For: Local:2:I.Data.0 Scope: Program (Line_1) 5. Create a new alias tag with the following properties: Name: Motor_On Type: Alias Alias For: Local:0:O.Data.0 Scope: Program (Line_1)
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2e56r
4--20
Exercise: Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
6. Create a new tag with the following properties: Name: Motor_Time Type: Base Data Type: TIMER Scope: Program (Line_1) 7. Within the Program Tags monitor, enter 10,000 for the Motor_Time.PRE member of the Motor_Time tag. 8. Create a new alias tag with the following properties: Name: Motor_Speed Type: Alias Alias For: Local:8:I.Ch0Data Scope: Program (Line_1) 9. Create a new alias tag with the following properties: Name: Speed_Out Type: Alias Alias For: Local:7:O.Ch0Data Scope: Program (Line_1) 10. Create a single-dimension array that will be used to store the system date and time. This array requires a separate element for the system year, month, day, hour, minute, seconds, and microseconds. Configure the array with the following properties: Name: ClockTime Type: Base Data Type: DINT Array Dimension 0: 7 elements Scope: Controller External Access: Read only 11. Download your project to the controller in slot 1 of your workstation. 12. Place the controller in Run or Remote Run mode. 13. How could the individual members of this UDT be set so they would not be accessible from any other application?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TA2e56r
Exercise: Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
4--21
14. Verify you properly created and aliased your tags by performing the following actions: A. Press DI0 and observe DO0 indicator light turn on. B. Adjust pot AI0 and confirm potentiometer AO0 updates in value while the motor is enabled. C. Confirm that after ten seconds indicator DO0 turns off. D. Monitor the ClockTime array and verify the tag is populating with system date and time information.
Tip "
The system date and time may not be current. 15. Go offline and close your project.
How Did You Do?
Turn to the Answers section.
Exercise B
In this exercise, you will practice setting a tag’s external access option, and verify the setting. Context: You have created and organized a project file for your production lines. You now want to protect certain tags from outside access. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the TA2_1756r_B1.acd file. 2. Download your project to the controller in slot 1. 3. Make sure your processor is in Run mode. 4. Monitor the ClockTime tag in RSLinx software and make sure some of the data is changing. 5. Return to the RSLogix 5000 software and go offline. 6. In the Controller tags, set the ClockTime tag’s external access to None. 7. Download your project to the controller in slot 1. 8. Is the ClockTime tag visible in RSLinx software?
How Did You Do? Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2e56r
4--22
Exercise: Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Answers
Exercise A 3. Your Stop_Motor tag should have the following properties:
4. Your Start_Motor tag should have the following properties:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TA2e56r
Exercise: Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
4--23
5. Your Motor_On tag should have the following properties:
6. Your Motor_Time tag should have the following properties:
7. Your Motor_Time tag should be configured similar to the following example:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2e56r
4--24
Exercise: Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
8. Your Motor_Speed tag should have the following properties:
9. Your Speed_Out tag should have the following properties:
10. Your ClockTime tag should have the following properties:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TA2e56r
Exercise: Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
4--25
13. Set the external access to none. 14. D. Your ClockTime tag should contain data in each member of the array like the following example:
Exercise B 6. After setting the ClockTime tag’s external access to None, your screen should appear similar to the following:
8. No, the ClockTime tag is not visible. Your screen should appear similar to the following:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. TA2e56r
4--26
Exercise: Organizing Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 TA2e56r
Lesson
5
Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Create a user-defined data type Export and import user-defined data types
When You Will Do This As you develop your logic, you will typically take advantage of user--defined data types to organize your data.
Before You Begin
Creating a User-Defined Data Type
Add that in RSLogix 5000 software, timers have some additional bits. Note that in a PLC-5 controller, T4:5 has its memory defined using the TIMER template. Data Type
Some predefined data types, such as a TIMER, are structures of several different data types:
Mixed Data Types
Members of a TIMER Data Type
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. UDTsb56r
5--2
Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Review: An element is one part of an array. A member is one part of a data type.
User-Defined Data Type: A structure created by a user to group data in an application. Member: One defined data type within the structure. Example: User-Defined Data Type
Chalk Talk: Before showing the next slide, have the students help you make a list of the members that might go into the user-defined data type for the tank example. Have the students select the data type of each member.
There are several identical tanks in a plant. Each tank stores data for the following values:
Temperature Steam Valve State Time over Temperature Level
Add that this is a more efficient use of memory than creating a single BOOL for the steam valve, as the single BOOL would use a DINT (32 bits) by itself.
To store this data, a user-defined data type can be created. The data type is a template for storing the information:
Size Members of Tank Structure
Provide other examples, including examples of recipe parameters and storage data types.
External Access Settings
A tag for each tank can be created using this user-defined data type.
Note that creating an array is easier than creating 20 individual tags.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 UDTsb56r
Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Note that in this scenario, the user-defined data type is created first, and then the array of tags is created.
5--3
Example: Arrays and User-Defined Data Types If there are 25 tanks (5 rows of 5), a programmer can make an array of tags that uses a user-defined data type:
Tank [0,0]
Total Array = [5,5]
One Specific Element = Tank[1,3]
User-Defined Data Type Parameters
Stress that arrays embedded within a user-defined data type can only have one dimension.
Note that memory size is updated after each member is added and accepted in the software’s Edit Data Type dialog box. Chalk Talk: On the board, write the following data types in order: BOOL, DINT, and then a BOOL. Discuss how this structure would take more memory than the DINT followed by both BOOLs. Add some additional examples.
Note that this is similar to how you address TIMER members in other projects (T4.EN or T4.TT). State that the delimiter is a period.
To create a user-defined data type, you must define the following parameters for each member: A name of up to a maximum of 40 characters
A display style A description (optional) One of the following data types: -- Any pre-defined data type -- Another user-defined data type -- Single-dimension array of any pre-defined data types -- Single-dimension array of any user-defined data types The memory required by a user-defined data type depends on the number of members, the data type for each member, and how the members are organized. User-Defined Data Type Addressing Just as you addressed TIMER members in other projects (T4.EN or T4.TT), you can address members of a user-defined structure using the following addressing structure: Tag.Member Examples: User-Defined Data Type Addressing
Point out that the last example contains a structure (Load_Info) that is embedded in the user-defined data type.
SystemTimer.Pre WaterTank.Level Input_Location.Load_Info.Height
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. UDTsb56r
5--4
Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Exporting and Importing User-Defined Data Types Exporting and importing allows you to have more flexibility in your programming and creates a user-defined data that: Is easy to deploy
Creates reusable programming code When you export a user-defined data type to an .L5X file, the file contains the definition and any references to the project.
Export a UDT using a .L5X File
Importing a user-defined data type allows you to perform several edits in one operation. When you import a user-defined data type, you can: Import offline or online (including Remote Run mode)
Import into the same project or different one Create a new user-defined data type Update an existing user-defined data type Import a UDT into the same or new project Specify final name
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Obtain collision information
Rev. August 2012 UDTsb56r
Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Here’s How
5--5
To perform the following tasks: Create a user-defined data type Export and import user-defined data types Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the steps below to help guide you during the demonstration: Open the Start Pages and use the following tools to demonstrate each task:
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
Location of the procedures in the Start Pages
How Do I " Tags, Data Types & Other Data " Create a User-Defined Type
-
Difference between a user--defined data type and an array
S
What’s New " Import Online Programs, Routine and Instructions
-
S
If the Start Pages are unavailable or if students prefer, use the CCP143_1756r_DEM2.acd project.
Overwriting a user--defined data type with a newer version
S
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. UDTsb56r
5--6
Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 UDTsb56r
Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
5--7
Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice the following tasks: Create a user-defined data type
Export and import user-defined data types Context: You have just created and organized a project file for your line 1 production line. You are now ready to develop code for a second, identical, production line. Your application requires that you store each production line’s output information in user-defined tags. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the UDT_1756r_A1.acd file. 2. Create a UDT named Motor_Status with the following members: Name
Data Type
Active
BOOL
Fault
BOOL
ProcessTime
DINT
MotorSpeed
REAL
3. Create a new tag with the following properties: Name: Line_1 Type: Base Data Type: Motor_Status Scope: Controller 4. Open MainRoutine within the Line_1 program. 5. Modify rung 4 so that member Line_1.Active is the operand of the OTE instruction. 6. Modify rung 5 so that member Line_1.ProcessTime is the Destination operand of the Move instruction. 7. Modify rung 6 so that member Line_1.MotorSpeed is the Destination operand of the Move instruction.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. UDTe56r
5--8
Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
8. Create a new tag with the following properties: Name: Line_2 Type: Base Data Type: Motor_Status Scope: Controller 9. Open MainRoutine within the Line_2 program. 10. Modify rung 4 so that member Line_2.Active is the operand of the OTE instruction. 11. Modify rung 5 so that member Line_2.ProcessTime is the Destination operand of the Move instruction. 12. Modify rung 6 so that member Line_2.MotorSpeed is the Destination operand of the Move instruction. 13. Download your project to the controller in slot 1 of your workstation. 14. Place the controller in Run or Remote Run mode. 15. Verify you properly created your UDT tags by monitoring them and confirming they update in value when Lines 1 and 2 are operating. 16. Export the Motor_Status user-defined data type project component. 17. Go offline. 18. Open the UDT_1756r_A2.acd file. 19. Import the Motor_Status user-defined data type project component into the UDT_1756r_A2.acd project. 20. From the Import Collision dialog box, click Collision Details. 21. What information changed in the imported UDT?
22. Click Close. 23. Overwrite the existing Motor_Status UDT and keep the same final name. 24. Click OK.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 UDTe56r
Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
5--9
25. Create a new tag with the following properties: Name: Line_3 Type: Base Data Type: Motor_Status Scope: Controller 26. Open MainRoutine within the Line_3 program. 27. Modify rung 4 so that member Line_3.Active is the operand of the OTE instruction. 28. Modify rung 5 so that member Line_3.ProcessTime is the Destination operand of the Move instruction. 29. Modify rung 6 so that member Line_3.MotorSpeed is the Destination operand of the Move instruction. 30. Download your project to the controller in slot 1 of your workstation. 31. Place the controller in Run or Remote Run mode. 32. Verify you properly created your UDT tags by monitoring them and confirming they update in value when Line 3 is operating. 33. Go offline and close your projects.
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. UDTe56r
5--10
Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Answers
Exercise A 2. Your Motor_Status UDT should look similar to the following example:
7. Rungs 4--6 of the MainRoutine in the Line_1 program should now look similar to the following example:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 UDTe56r
Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
5--11
12. Rungs 4--6 of the MainRoutine in the Line_2 program should now look similar to the following example:
21. The data type size and the structure changed.
23. You should have configured the imported UDT as follows:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. UDTe56r
5--12
Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Data Type in an RSLogix 5000 Project
29. Rungs 4--6 of the MainRoutine in the Line_3 program should now look similar to the following example:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 UDTe56r
Lesson Note that this lesson briefly reviews some concepts from the prerequisite course before presenting more advanced concepts such as Quick Keys. Tailor this lesson as needed.
What You Will Learn Poll the students to see how many have experience using a Window’s-based programming software from their job, or pre-requisite classes. Pace this lesson based on the general experience level of your class. Describe which method you personally find to be fastest and/or easiest when entering ladder logic.
Before You Begin Review the first two methods if needed. Students should be familiar with these.
6
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Enter and edit ladder Logic using ASCII mnemonics
Configure ladder logic quick keys Copy and reuse ladder logic components Verify a project or a project component (online) When You Will Do This Once you have laid out your task and program structure and defined your data types, you can begin to develop your ladder logic.
Entering and Editing Ladder Logic Components The RSLogix series of software offers the ability to enter or edit ladder logic using the following basic methods: Dragging method Right-click/Insert key The RSLogix series of software also offers faster methods for more proficient programmers: ASCII mnemonic editing
Quick keys
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EN2sb56r
6--2
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
ASCII Mnemonic Editing State that ASCII stands for the American Standards Code for Information Exchange.
ASCII mnemonics are text codes that represent instructions and ladder logic elements: ASCII Text Entry Line Graphical Ladder Logic
Read each mnemonic in the graphic and show the corresponding graphical element. Note that unlike RSLogix 5 and 500 software, in RSLogix 5000 the ASCII line is not highlighted by default and therefore more difficult to accidentally erase.
In the graphic, note the following items: The mnemonics are entered, followed by the tag to be operated on or a “?” or a space. Start and end points for branches can also be entered:
-- BST (Branch start) -- NXB (Next Branch) -- BND (Branch End) Configuring Ladder Logic Quick Keys
Point out that Quick Keys are enabled in the Options for the Ladder Editor. This step is included in the procedure in the Procedures Guide.
To quickly enter instructions and other ladder logic elements using single keyboard keys, assign quick keys: Quick keys for several common instructions including XIC, XIO, and OTE are already assigned. Quick keys must be enabled to be used.
Copying and Reusing Ladder Logic Components Describe examples of real applications, such as auto production lines, where common machine cells are repeated.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
If ladder logic contains program-scoped tags, the ladder logic can be easily copied and reused in different programs without changing the tag names.
Rev. August 2012 EN2sb56r
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
6--3
Example: Copied Ladder Logic Because the programs are local, the same ladder logic and the tags (e.g., Station_Timer) can be copied to all programs.
Same Program_Scoped Tag Name
Different Program Same Program_Scoped Tag Name Easy Copy and Paste
The tags within the program are commonly alias tags for different I/O points.
Remember that controller-scoped tags are shared by all programs. Be careful when accessing the same controller-scoped tag from different routines.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EN2sb56r
6--4
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Other Short-Cuts These additional methods will also make you a more efficient programmer: RSLogix 5000 software also offers the ability to open a second instance of the software:
-- This allows you to easily copy and paste ladder logic between two open files. For ladder logic and structured text, you can save instruction defaults: -- These defaults are saved to the computer and apply to all projects opened on the computer. State that up to four instances of the software can be opened at one time.
Verifying a Project or a Project Component Online
Note that you can also copy from one file, close the file, open a different file, and then paste into the other file. The copied information is maintained on the clipboard.
Modifying code online can help you quickly make changes without stopping production. Online Safety Warning When editing ladder logic online, keep the following warning in mind:
Describe any real-world situations that you are aware of in which online editing caused extensive damage in a plant.
? Define offline and online? Answer: Offline means that the workstation (computer) is displaying a copy of the project stored in the computer memory only. Online means that the workstation (computer) is displaying and changing copy of the project stored in the controller memory.
Add that the Online graphic is animated in any online mode. Also note that the left and right power rails are illuminated in green in the online mode to indicate that the ladder logic is being executed. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Use extreme caution when entering or editing ladder logic or data, forcing values, or making other changes online that will affect the control of devices. Mistakes can cause unintended machine motion or loss of process control, possibly injuring personnel and damaging equipment. Before performing procedures online, complete these safety precautions:
Determine if changes must be made online. Verify that your company permits online entering and editing.
Assess how machinery will respond to changes. Check proposed changes for accuracy. Notify all personnel of the changes. Verify that you are online to the correct controller.
Because changes in any online mode can affect machine and process control, before entering ladder logic, verify the current communications mode using the Online toolbar. Rev. August 2012 EN2sb56r
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
6--5
Performing Online Ladder Logic Edits Editing ladder logic elements online requires different steps in different modes: State that the additional online steps are another reason that online editing is slower and more difficult. The extra steps are in place for user safety.
When editing in this mode . . .
You must perform the following actions . . .
Routine(s) edits exist only in the computer. Necessary when changing an existing rung, but not necessary to add a new rung. The project is examined for errors. Verification can be done separately or automatically if you skip to the Accept edits step. The revised routine(s) are transferred to the controller. Routine(s) edits exist only in the computer. Necessary when changing an existing rung, but not necessary to add a new rung. The project is examined for errors. Verification can be done separately or automatically if you skip to the Accept edits step. The revised routine(s) are transferred to the controller but the previous program continues to execute. The revised routine(s) executes, controlling the physical outputs, but the previous program still exists in the controller. You can return to the previous program using Untest edits. The previous routine(s) language is discarded and the revised program continues executing.
Start edits
Tell students that the Verify edits step can be considered optional since the verification process will automatically take place with the Accept edits step.
Online in the Remote Program mode
Verify edits
Accept edits
Start edits
State that “accept” puts the change into the controller memory.
Verify edits
Online in the Remote Run mode
Important: Stress the difference between controller Remote Test mode (outputs set according to Program mode state) and the Test edits step in Verify, Accept, Test, Assemble (outputs scanned and set using the program). Program mode state is set in the output module configuration.
If students are interested, review the names of all of the buttons during the demonstration using the Tooltips.
Description . . .
Accept edits
Test edits
Assemble edits
Online verification buttons can be used to complete this process: Standard Toolbar Verify Controller
Verify Open Routine
Single-Rung Options
Program-Level Options
Online Edit Toolbar Cancel Pending Rung Edit
Tip " Rev. August 2012
Finalize Edits Option
Use tooltips to identify the buttons. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EN2sb56r
6--6
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
For the invalid data type error, clarify that a tag of the DINT data type cannot be used in an XIC bit instruction unless it is specified to the bit level (e.g., DINT.0 and not just DINT).
When verifying, the software looks for the following errors: Improper instruction placement Improper or incomplete addressing
Tags with an invalid data type for the instruction (mismatches) Improper tag creation Empty rungs Shorted branches (reported in error tab as a warning) Duplicate destructive bits (reported in error tab as a warning)
Point out that this option can be enabled using ToolsOptions.
The duplicate destructive bit option looks for instructions that modify the same bit. This includes instructions such as OTE, ONS, OSF, and OSR instructions in ladder logic. This option is enabled by default.
Mention that this is known as “duplicate OTE detection” in PLC/SLC processors. Note that this also includes bits used in other languages, such as OREFs in FBD, bits in transitions in SFCs, and bit assignments in ST.
Presence of Always False Instruction (AFI) (reported in error tab as a warning)
Presence of forces (reported in error tab as a warning) Note that this is an option found in the ToolsOptions dialog box.
Auto Rung Verification: An option that can be enabled to automatically verify a rung. Errors found in the verification process are displayed on the Errors tab of the Output window:
Double-Click to Go to the Error or Press F4
Finalize Edits Option Point out some benefits of this option: S
Fewer steps required to go from change to running code
S
Reduces system startup time by eliminating delays
Compare these benefits to some of the inherit risks.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
The Finalize Edits option allows you to complete online edits in one step. For equipment and personnel safety, the full sequence of steps (verify, accept, test, assemble) should be used as it requires the programmers to check the steps and test them before assembling them in the controller. The Finalize Edits option should be reserved for changes that will not impact safety.
Rev. August 2012 EN2sb56r
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
6--7
Edit Zone Markers Poll the students to see if they are aware of online editing policies in their own companies.
When you start editing online, a duplicate rung is displayed:
Edit Rung
Original Rung (Active in Controller)
Rung numbers after the edit are temporarily changed while the edit rung is being modified.
Mention that an asterisk “:” on any instruction, tab, etc., indicates that the element has been edited but not yet accepted.
During the editing and verifying process edit zone markers indicate the type of edit that is being performed: Once the edit in Remote Run mode is accepted into the controller memory, the markers change to uppercase letters.
Note that these markers are the same as the edit markers in RSLogix 5 and 500 software. Point out that for reference, this information is in the Procedures Guide Glossary under the term “Edit Zones.”
The following table summarizes the zone markers and their meanings: Zone Marker e Lowercase
Uppercase (in controller memory)
Rev. August 2012
Description
i r I R D
Rung of ladder logic that is currently edited within the computer RAM Rung of ladder logic that is to be inserted Rung of ladder logic that is to be replaced Rung of ladder logic that will be inserted Rung of ladder logic that is going to be replaced by the rung directly above it Rung of ladder logic that is marked for deletion
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EN2sb56r
6--8
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Online Editing in a Multiple-User Environment RSLogix 5000 software allows more than one user to be online with the same controller at the same time: Each user has an up-to-date view of the controller data
Changes made by one user are immediately seen by all other users.
Two programmers may be online to the same controller during commissioning or if a controller has a large main routine with multiple blocks of code (i.e., each block of code controls a different machine in a system). Online Toolbar
Question: In what situations might two programmers be online to the same controller? Status icons in the Online toolbar and bottom-right corner of the screen show if multiple users are editing an online project: Bottom Right Corner of Screen
Selected
Controller Unlocked Controller Locked Controller Locked by Another User Project Changed by Another User
Keep the following points in mind about editing ladder logic when multiple users are online: A common best practice is to lock the controller:
-- This ensures only one person can be making edits to the logic at one time. If more than one programmer must be making changes at the same time, carefully coordinate your work so changes aren’t being made to the same routine at the same time: -- Edits to a routine by one programmer can wipe out pending edits by other users. If possible, avoid having two programmers working on different routines in the same program: -- The routine edit commands (Accept, Test, Untest, Assemble, and Cancel) are performed on a program basis. -- Executing one of these commands affects another user’s edits, causing potential loss of work. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EN2sb56r
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Here’s How
6--9
To enter ladder logic by performing the following tasks: Enter and edit ladder Logic using ASCII mnemonics Configure ladder logic quick keys
Copy and reuse ladder logic components Verify a project or a project component (online) Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the CCP143_1756r_DEM2.acd project during the demonstration: " To copy and reuse rungs, instructions, and branches, refer to the Copying and Reusing Project Components procedure.
Rev. August 2012
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
Entering logic using the ASCII text editor
-
Online verification buttons
-
Locking the controller
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EN2sb56r
6--10
Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EN2sb56r
Exercise: Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
6--11
Exercise: Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice entering, editing, and verifying ladder logic in an RSLogix 5000 project. Context: You have been asked to add the ladder logic that will be used to control the sequential portion of your application to an existing project. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the EN2_1756r_A1.acd file. 2. Download the project and then change the controller to Remote Run mode. 3. Lock the controller to prevent other users from making online changes to your project. 4. Open SecondaryRoutine and perform the following actions: A. Using any method you choose, create the following ladder logic: If the value from AI0 is greater than 500, turn on DO0. B. Assign the existing AI0 and DO0 tags to the logic components. C. Verify the rung (online). D. Test the operation by setting analog input 0 (AI0) to a value over 500. E. Check that digital output 0 (DO0) turns on. If not, return and modify your work.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EN2e56r
6--12
Exercise: Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
F. Use the ASCII mnemonic editing method to enter the following rung:
G. What does your ASCII text entry line look like for this rung? (What syntax did you use?)
H. Save and accept the edits and test for proper operation of this rung. I. Test the operation by setting analog input 0 (AI0) to a value between 100 and 200. J. Check that digital output 0 (DO1) turns on. If not, return and modify your work. K. Once your work is correct, turn analog input 0 all the way to the left to shut off the light. L. Copy the rung you created in step 4. A. and reuse it to program the following logic, modifying the rung as necessary: If the value from AI0 exceeds 700, turn on DO2. M. Save the edits. N. Test the operation by setting analog input 0 (AI0) to a value over 700. O. Check that digital output 2 (DO2) turns on. If not, return and modify your work. P. Enable the quick keys. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EN2e56r
Exercise: Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
6--13
Q. Configure the F5 key to be the RUNG (Start of Rung -- End of Rung) command. R. Using the quick key method, create the following logic and necessary tags: If DO0 has been on for three seconds, turn on DO3. If DO0 is turned off, DO3 turns off as well. S. Save and accept the edits and test for proper operation of your rung. T. Are any of these cases where you could use the Finalize Edits option? Why or why not?
5. When you are finished editing the program, unlock the controller.
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EN2e56r
6--14
Exercise: Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Answers
Exercise A 4. A. The rung should look similar to the following example:
G. BST LIM 100 AI0 200 NXB EQU AI0 300 BND OTE DO1 L. The rung should look similar to the following example:
P. To enable the quick keys, from the Tools menu, perform the following actions:
-- Select Options Ladder Editor. -- Select the Enable Quick Key check box. -- Select the Show Quick Key Configuration check box.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EN2e56r
Exercise: Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
6--15
Q. To assign F5 as the SOR command, perform the following actions:
-- On the Workstation Options Ladder Editor window, click the Configure button. -- Scroll to F5 and then double-click _Free. -- From the drop-down list, select Rung.
R. The rungs should look similar to the following example:
T. The Finalize Edits option should only be used when there is no safety concern. If this indicator light is not a safety-related indicator, the Finalize Edits option could be used.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EN2e56r
6--16
Exercise: Entering, Editing, and Verifying Ladder Logic in an RSLogix 5000 Project
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EN2e56r
Lesson
7
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to manually add a 1756-I/O module to an I/O configuration.
When You Will Do This You can add your I/O modules to your project before, during, or after you develop your application logic. At some point though, you have to add the I/O modules so you can link your logic to specific devices. Reference: RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide 1. Find the Adding a Local or Remote 1756--I/O Module to an I/O Configuration procedure in your procedures guide. 2. Briefly read the Get Ready steps. In this lesson you’ll focus on adding local modules.
Question: What does the term local I/O mean? Remote I/O? Question: When do you usually add I/O modules to your projects?
Point out that in this lesson you’ll manually add the modules.
Before You Begin
Question: Are the modules usually installed at that point? Do you usually have access to them?
Electronic Keying Before you add an I/O module, plan your electronic keying:
Electronic Keying and Revision Level
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. IO2sb56r
7--2
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
If you have already presented the Troubleshooting Logix5000 Analog I/O Module Problems lesson, the discussion on electronic keying, keying attributes, keying examples, and disabled keying can be skipped.
The electronic keying feature: Automatically compares the expected module (as shown in the I/O Configuration tree) to the physical module before I/O communications begin
Helps prevent communications to a module that does not match the type and revision expected Determines if and how an electronic keying check is performed Typically, three keying options are available: Exact Match Compatible Keying Disable Keying
Tip "
The compatible keying option is the default selection. Keying Attributes Electronic keying is based on these attributes: Vendor Product Type
Product Code Major Revision Minor Revision Example: Exact Match Keying Prevents Communication
Module Configuration Vendor = Allen-Bradley Product Type = Digital Input Module Catalog Number = 1756-IB16D Major Revision = 3 Minor Revision = 1
Communication is Prevented
X
Physical Module Vendor = Allen-Bradley Product Type = Digital Input Module Catalog Number = 1756-IB16D Major Revision = 3 Minor Revision = 2
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 IO2sb56r
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
7--3
Example: Compatible Keying Prevents Communication
Module Configuration Vendor = Allen-Bradley Product Type = Digital Input Module Catalog Number = 1756-IB16D Major Revision = 3 Minor Revision = 3
Communication is Prevented Physical Module
X
Vendor = Allen-Bradley Product Type = Digital Input Module Catalog Number = 1756-IB16D Major Revision = 3 Minor Revision = 2
Example: Compatible Keying Allows Communication
Module Configuration Vendor = Allen-Bradley Product Type = Digital Input Module Catalog Number = 1756-IB16D Major Revision = 2 Minor Revision = 1
Communication is Allowed Physical Module Vendor = Allen-Bradley Product Type = Digital Input Module Catalog Number = 1756-IB16D Major Revision = 3 Minor Revision = 2
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. IO2sb56r
7--4
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
Disabled Keying With Disabled Keying, I/O communication may occur with a module other than the type specified in the I/O Configuration tree with unpredictable results. We generally do not recommend using Disabled Keying. Be extremely cautious when using Disabled Keying; if used incorrectly, this option can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Asynchronous I/O Update Review Point out that this is different from other controllers that have an input scan, then a program scan (code), and then an output scan within the operating cycle.
In Logix5000 controllers, I/O values update asynchronously with the execution of code: 1. Input modules multicast their data to the backplane at the RPI rate set in the modules. 2. The code is scanned and the output tags are updated immediately after the execution of each output instruction. 3. Values are sent to the output modules at the RPI rate and at the end of each task.
Tip "
The automatic output processing that occurs at the end of a task can be disabled in the properties of the task.
Digital Module Multicasting Rates Note that these values must be set in the initial configuration but can be adjusted at any time.
The multicasting of digital I/O data is affected by the rates selected during module configuration: RPI (Requested Packet Interval)
COS (Change of State) RPI (Requested Packet Interval) The RPI controls the following actions: Specifies the time that elapses before the module multicasts the current data in the on-board memory:
-- 200 microseconds (.2 ms) -- 750 ms
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 IO2sb56r
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
7--5
COS (Change of State) When the COS option is enabled for digital I/O, data transfer occurs whenever a specified terminal changes state (transitions from on to off or off to on): All data is multicast whenever one point changes state. To clarify, state that COS multicasts module data on any change of state and RPI multicasts module data at a specified time.
Point out that the input data is changing within the scan of the logic.
An RPI for digital I/O must be specified whether or not the COS option is enabled. Data will be multicast at the RPI rate whether or not a change of state occurs.
Example: RPI and COS
Single Scan Physical Device Data is received by the input card Rung RPI Rate 100
COS
Tag is set or cleared in controller
Rung 250
Optional
RPI Rate
Rung 400
Analog Module Multicasting Rates Note that analog module multicasting rates are different from digital modules that multicast based on RPI or COS parameters.
The multicasting of analog data is affected by the rates selected during module configuration: RPI -- This parameter works in the same manner as it does for a digital module
Note that RTS is actually set on a different screen, but is discussed now with RPI.
RTS -- (Real Time Sampling Rate)
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. IO2sb56r
7--6
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
RTS (Real Time Sampling Rate) The RTS instructs a module to perform the following operations: Scan all of the input channels and store the data in the on-board memory
Multicast the updated channel data and other status data to the backplane of the local chassis
Tip "
RPI multicasts the current contents of the on-board memory. RTS scans the inputs prior to multicasting.
Output States For output modules, output states during specific situations can be set on the Configuration tab: Output States During Program Mode Output States During Fault Mode
Output State During Communication Failure in Program Mode Output States are Set Per Point
Example: An application that includes a hot oven might set a fan output to on during Program, Test, or Fault mode.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Operators and other personnel should be aware of the configured output states for these situations: Program Mode: Sets the physical output devices to either on, off, or hold during specific situations: -- Program or Remote Program mode -- Remote Test mode -- During a major recoverable fault Fault Mode: Sets the physical output devices to either on, off, or hold during a major non-recoverable fault.
Rev. August 2012 IO2sb56r
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
7--7
Diagnostics On the Configuration screen of the wizard, the following other parameters must be defined: Diagnostic Features
I/O Points
? How are diagnostic modules identified in the part number?
Answer: The part number has a “D” as the suffix, e.g., 1756-IB16D.
Depending on the module, 1756 digital and analog diagnostic I/O modules have the following diagnostic features: Open Wire Detection: Open wire detection senses removed or disconnected field wiring on an input module: A leakage resistor must be placed across the contacts of an input device.
The modules must detect minimum leakage current or a point-level fault is sent to the controller.
Field Power Loss Detection: When field power to a module is lost, a point-level fault is sent to the controller. No Load Detection: Senses the absence of field wiring or a missing load from each output point in the off state only. Field Side Output Verification: Indicates that the code changes are accurately represented on the power side of a switching device (i.e., the output is on when it is commanded to be on). Note that the pulse test is typically performed during commissioning or troubleshooting.
Rev. August 2012
Pulse Test: Briefly sends a signal that verifies the output without energizing the load.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. IO2sb56r
7--8
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
Mention that fault data can be monitored in controller tags for each module. To create a status window, collect fault data in a user-defined structure. Add that latching can help you see where a fault occurred even if the cause of the fault has already been cleared (e.g., if the fault occurred and cleared overnight). Note that diagnostic modules require the most configuration. The workstation modules are diagnostic. This will give students the most practice. All other modules are just subsets.
Note that resetting the module manually is done by individual points. There is no “reset all points” option. For a standard course, note that the CIP message instruction that resets the diagnostics will be presented in the Configuring a Message in an RSLogix 5000 Project lesson. If the Diagnostic Latching parameter in the configuration is not set, the fault bit will clear when the source problem is removed.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Point-Level Electronic Fusing: To prevent too much current from flowing through a module, certain digital modules have internal electronic fusing. The fuses are cleared when one of the following actions occurs: A message instruction in the software resets the fuse.
A power cycle resets the fuse. Diagnostic Latching If any of the diagnostic faults are detected, the following events occur: The fault data is multicast to all controllers. The I/O module LED displays a fault.
A fault bit is latched and can be examined in the tags list. Even if the cause of an error has been cleared, the fault will remain set until one of the following actions occurs: The fault bit is manually reset in the I/O Module Properties dialog box.
A message instruction in a ladder logic routine resets the latch. A power cycle resets the output module. You cannot enter a “0” into the I/O fault tag to reset it.
Turn off the diagnostics for I/O points that will not be wired. Otherwise, the LED fault lights on the module will be active for unused I/O points, possibly confusing maintenance personnel who do not know that the points are unused.
Rev. August 2012 IO2sb56r
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
Here’s How
7--9
To plan your electronic keying decisions for the module. Reference: RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide 1. Make sure you are still at the Adding a Local or Remote 1756--I/O Module to an I/O Configuration procedure in your procedures guide. 2. Find the Manually Add an I/O Module section of the procedure.
Give students several situations. Have them use the decision table to determine which keying option to use.
3. Briefly read through the decision table for planning your electronic keying decision. Activity: Who’s got the lowest rev? You have decided to use compatible keying in your project. Consider the rest of the I/O modules in your classroom as possible replacements. Determine the lowest revision level for each module: 1. Find the I/O wiring diagrams in the back of this manual. 2. Go to your workstation and open RSLinx software. 3. Browse to the backplane of your workstation. 4. Right--click the first module in the chassis and click Device Properties. 5. Write the revision level for the module on its wiring diagram. 6. Repeat steps 4. and 5. for the rest of the I/O modules in the chassis. 7. Compare your results with the rest of the class and determine the lowest revision for each catalog number of module. Write that number on the module’s wiring diagram, circle it, and plan to use it in the exercise at the end of this lesson. Result: When you are done, you should have a decision on which revision level to use for each of your I/O modules.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. IO2sb56r
7--10
Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
Here’s How IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids.
To manually add a 1756-I/O module to an I/O configuration. Reference: RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide Talk your instructor through the steps in your procedures guide while he or she demonstrates them.
To demonstrate: 1. Open the CCP143_1756r_DEM3.acd project. 2. Have students talk you through adding a digital module. 3. Have student talk you through adding an analog input module. 4. Have student talk you through adding an analog output module.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Where to clear diagnostics for unused points
-
Where to set analog scaling and alarm values
-
Where to set clamping limits
-
How to confirm communication is OK after you download the project
-
Where to find tags for point data, channel data, point faults, and alarms
-
Where to reset latched diagnostics
Rev. August 2012 IO2sb56r
Exercise: Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
7--11
Exercise: Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice adding and configuring local 1756-I/O modules to the I/O Configuration of an RSLogix 5000 project. Directions: 1. Review the partial I/O list below for your application:
Device
Tag (Alias)
Slot
Chan
Min / Off
Max / On
IO2_1756r_A1
2
12
24 VDC Sink
No Part
Part
CH0_Analog_Input
Conveyor
8
0
0--10 VDC
0.0
100.0
Press and Stake Pressure Indicator
CH0_Analog_Meter
Conveyor
7
0
0--10 VDC
0.0
100.0
Weld Pressure Transmitter
CH1_Analog_Input
Conveyor
8
1
0--10 VDC
0.0
1000.0
Weld Pressure Indicator
CH1_Analog_Meter
Conveyor
7
1
0--10 VDC
0.0
1000.0
Conveyor Motor Starter
Conveyor
Conveyor
0
1
24 VDC Source
Conveyor Start Pushbutton
Start
Conveyor
2
0
24 VDC Sink
Start
Conveyor Stop Pushbutton
Stop
Conveyor
2
8
24 VDC Sink
Stop
Press Actuator
Station_Output
Station_1_Press
0
3
24 VDC Source
Press Command
Stake Actuator
Station_Output
Station_2_Stake
0
4
24 VDC Source
Stake Command
Part Present Photoeye
Part_Sensor
Press and Stake Pressure Transmitter
Scope
Signal
Start Command
2. Review the partial alarm list below for your application: Slot
Chan
Part Present Photoeye
Device
Part_Sensor_PointFlt
Conveyor
2
12
24 VDC Sink
Point Fault
Conveyor Start Pushbutton
Start_PointFlt
Conveyor
2
0
24 VDC Sink
Point Fault
Conveyor Stop Pushbutton
Stop_PointFlt
Conveyor
2
8
24 VDC Sink
Point Fault
Conveyor Motor Starter
Conveyor_PointFlt
Conveyor
0
1
24 VDC Source
Point Fault
Press and Stake Pressure Transmitter
Alarm_High
Station_1_Press
8
0
0--10 VDC
>60
Press and Stake Pressure Transmitter
Alarm_Low
Station_1_Press
8
0
0--10 VDC
<40
Weld Pressure Indicator
Alarm_High
Station_2_Weld
8
1
0--10 VDC
>600
Weld Pressure Indicator
Alarm_Low
Station_2_Weld
8
1
0--10 VDC
<400
Rev. August 2012
Alarm (Alias tag)
Scope
Signal
Trip
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. IO2e56r
7--12
Exercise: Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
3. Open the IO2_1756r_A1.acd file. 4. Add these modules to your project’s I/O Configuration. Use the I/O list, alarm list, wiring diagrams, and your class notes for any additional information you need:
Slot
Suggested module name
-
0
Assembly_Digital_Outputs
2
System_Digital_Inputs
7
Assembly_Pressure_Meters
8
Assembly_Pressure_Sensors
5. Convert these tags to aliases for correct data:
-
CH0_Analog_Input CH1_Analog_Meter CH1_Analog_Input CH0_Analog_Meter
6. Convert the tags on the alarm list to aliases for the correct fault or alarm bits. 7. Save your project and download it to the controller.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 IO2e56r
Exercise: Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
7--13
8. Test the application and verify that it meets the requirements below. Correct any problems you find: Requirement
Test / verification method
-
No I/O module faults.
Visually check the controller and I/O Configuration folder.
No point--level faults for any unused I/O points.
Visually check the front of each digital I/O module.
-
CH0_Analog_Input shows the range of values.
Monitor the tag in logic and confirm that its minimum and maximum values match the I/O list specification.
-
CH0_Analog_Meter shows the range of values.
Monitor the tag in logic and confirm that its minimum and maximum values match the I/O list specification.
-
CH1_Analog_Input shows the range of values.
Monitor the tag in logic and confirm that its minimum and maximum values match the I/O list specification.
-
CH1_Analog_Meter shows the range of values.
Monitor the tag in logic and confirm that its minimum and maximum values match the I/O list specification.
-
High and low alarms for Press and Stake Pressure Transmitter trip on specified limits.
Monitor the alarm bits in logic and confirm they turn on at the specified limits.
-
High and low alarms for Weld Pressure Transmitter trip on specified limits.
Monitor the alarm bits in logic and confirm they turn on at the specified limits. A. Remove the terminal block of the digital output module and confirm the Conveyor_Flt bit turns on. B. Replace the terminal block.
-
Conveyor_Flt bit turns on for any point fault of the conveyor equipment.
C. Reset any latched diagnostic bits. D. Remove the terminal block of the digital input module and confirm the Conveyor_Flt bit turns on. E. Replace the terminal block. F. Reset any latched diagnostic bits.
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. IO2e56r
Exercise: Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
7--14
Answers
Exercise A 4. The complete I/O configuration for the should look like this:
Only these points need diagnostics:
Only points 0 to 5 are wired to devices. Faults for points 6 to 15 are not set. Otherwise, faults will be indicated on the module LEDs.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 IO2e56r
Exercise: Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
7--15
You should have configured the analog outputs like this:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. IO2e56r
7--16
Exercise: Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
You should have configured the analog inputs like this:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 IO2e56r
Exercise: Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
7--17
5. Your analog aliases should look like this:
6. Your alarm aliases should look like this:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. IO2e56r
7--18
Exercise: Communicating with a Local 1756-I/O Module
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 IO2e56r
Lesson
8
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data What You Will Learn Note that in the lesson, data will be produced and consumed over the backplane. While this might not be as common as producing and consuming them over a network, it will allow students to practice sharing data before going into the details of the ControlNet or EtherNet/IP network. Add that a separate lesson is available for sharing data between controllers over a ControlNet or EtherNet/IP network.
Before You Begin
?What type of data would be
considered time-critical for your application?
Note that sharing unscheduled data with a MSG instruction is presented in a separate lesson.
After completing this lesson, you should be able configure a Logix5000 controller to produce and consume data by performing the following tasks: Configure a produced tag
Add a controller to an I/O configuration Configure a consumed tag Set RPI limits for a produced/consumed tag When You Will Do This Use produced and consumed tags when you want to share data between controllers.
Scheduled Data Scheduled Data: Information that is sent across a control-level network, such as ControlNet or EtherNet/IP, on a regular basis. This data has the following characteristics: Is time critical, such as I/O status and control interlocking data Has top priority in information exchange
Occurs in the same time frame during every data transmission interval Can be any of the following:
-- Data from an I/O module -- Peer-to-peer interlocking data of controllers To control I/O or produce and consume tags in a Logix5000 ControlNet application, data must be scheduled.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PC3sb56r
8--2
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
Produced and Consumed Tags In the graphic, point out that the Total tag is available to any other controller on the backplane. Note that the tag is still multicast. To reach two controllers, it does not have to be passed to one (like a message) then be passed to another.
Produced Tag: Scheduled data (controller-scoped tag) that is published (multicast) by a controller and available to one or more other controllers: Total
Consumed Tag: A tag whose value comes from a remote controller. The local controller is the consumer, and the remote controller is the producer. Consumed tags are always at controller scope.
Produced and Consumed Tag Requirements Note that these are the 32-bit data types. Add that 500 bytes equals 125 DINTs or 250 INTs.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Data that meets the following requirements can be shared by controllers without using messages: Tag that is 32 bits or larger (e.g., DINT, REAL, TIMER, COUNTER, etc.), an array of these data types, or user-defined data type Data that is less than or equal to 500 bytes
Rev. August 2012 PC3sb56r
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
Remind students that this is the tag being “sent”.
8--3
Configuring a Produced Tag In the Tag Properties dialog box, you can configure a tag to be produced:
Produce Option
Data Access Options
Highest Possible Number of Consumers
Rev. August 2012
Advanced Settings
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PC3sb56r
8--4
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
Adding a Controller to an I/O Configuration
Note that this is the name of the controller and not the project (if different). Note that the I/O Configuration identifies if the tag is being produced locally or over a network (and which network).
To share data, a path is created by adding the producing controller to the I/O configuration of the consuming controller and defining the following parameters: Name of the producing controller Slot number
Revision (major and minor): -- Electronic keying is compatible. Optional: -- Description -- Major fault option -- Inhibit option
Local Controllers
Add that the consumed tag can be created or it can be an existing tag that is modified.
Configuring a Consumed Tag A controller can only consume a single tag once. Setting up more than one consumed tag in the same controller results in unpredictable controller-to-controller communications.
If a consumed tag connection faults, all other tags being consumed from the producing controller will also stop receiving data.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PC3sb56r
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
8--5
A consumed tag is also defined in the Tag Properties dialog box: In the graphic, point out that the RPI is per tag and not controller. Name of the Consumed Tag
Mention that you must be offline or online in Program mode to change the RPI. Consumed Option
Mention that RPI in relation to the ControlNet network will be detailed in a different lesson.
Source Controller (as Named in the I/O Configuration) Exact Name of the Produced Tag in the Producing Controller
Rev. August 2012
The Amount of Time Between Updates of the Data
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PC3sb56r
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
8--6
Tag Names Point out that this is not the consumed tag name.
Tip "
The Remote Data (source tag name) must be exactly the same as the produced tag name in the producing controller. For accuracy, the source project should be opened and the tag names should be copied:
Producer
Consumer
Same
Note that consumed tag names do not require naming conventions through the software. However, your plant may opt to use naming conventions to make troubleshooting easier. Emphasize that if structures are the same size but different layout, data from the first member in structure A (e.g., a REAL) will incorrectly transfer to the first member in the other structure B (e.g., a DINT).
If a user-defined structure is produced, there must be a structure with the identical size and layout in the consuming controller. To ensure accuracy, copy the structures between projects.
Producer DINT DINT BOOL TIMER
Producer DINT DINT BOOL TIMER E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Data
Consumer TIMER BOOL DINT DINT
Data
Consumer DINT DINT BOOL TIMER Rev. August 2012 PC3sb56r
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
8--7
Produced and Consumed Arrays BOOL, SINT, and INT arrays can be indirectly produced and consumed by performing the following actions: Create a user-defined data type containing a single member:
-- Make the single member an array of the desired type Copy this user-defined data type to both controllers Produce and consume tags of this data type In addition, you can produce/consume an array of INTs to/from a PLC-5C controller over a ControlNet network by performing the following actions: Define a user-defined data type with two members: -- Name the first member Status and assign it a DINT data type -- Make the second member an array of INTs
Produced Tag Optimization Note that a separate lesson reviews the number of connections consumed by produced and consumed tags.
The number (and not size) of consumed tags is totaled and counted against the number of connections a system can support. To limit the number of connections used, consider grouping data into an array or a user-defined data type and producing only that array or structure.
A produced or consumed tag cannot be greater than 500 bytes (250 INTs or 125 DINTs).
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PC3sb56r
8--8
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
Tell the students that when the RPI request from a consumer is out-of-range, an automatic negotiation will allow the consumer to connect to the producer by using the default RPI value configured for the produced tag. RPI negotiation status will be reported to the user via the Consumed Tag Connection dialog.
Produce/Consume Tag RPI Limits Check If someone types a wrong RPI value for a consumed tag, it could overload the network and halt production. To prevent this, you can: Define a range of acceptable RPI values for each connection.
Define a default RPI value for out-of-range RPIs:
Minimum, Maximum and Default values can be modified Offline only.
Produced Tag Values
Set Min and Max RPI Range Set Default RPI
Consumer RPI of 2ms is out of range.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
=
Consumer RPI would get set to the default value of 10ms.
Rev. August 2012 PC3sb56r
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
8--9
Configure the consuming controller to use the default RPI:
Advanced Tab
Enable RPI Negotiation Here
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PC3sb56r
8--10
Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
Here’s How
To configure a Logix5000 controller to share data across the backplane by performing the following tasks: Configure a produced tag Add a controller to an I/O configuration
Configure a consumed tag Set RPI limits for a produced/consumed tag Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the CCP143_1756r_DEM4.acd project during the demonstration. Use the CCP143_1756r_DEM5.acd file to download to the controller in slot 3.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
Produced check box in the Edit Tags window
-
Produced For default (2)
-
Values in both controllers when the produced value changes
-
Tags filter to show produced or consumed tags only
Rev. August 2012 PC3sb56r
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
8--11
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice configuring Logix5000 controllers to produce and consume data across the backplane. Context: You have programmed the complete projects for the controller in slot 1 and the controller in slot 3. To exchange interlocking data between the controllers, you must configure the controllers to produce and consume data across the backplane. Tank level information must be produced from the controller in slot 1 and consumed by the controller in slot 3:
Producer
Consumer
When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the PC3_1756r_A1.acd file. 2. What scope must tags be in order to be produced or consumed?
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PC3e56r
8--12
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
3. Which data types can be produced?
4. Create a new tag with the following properties: Name: Tank_Level Type: Produced Connection: 4 Consumers Data Type: DINT Set tag to allow Unicast Consumer Connections 5. Verify the project and correct any errors. 6. Save the project. 7. Download the project to the controller in slot 1. 8. Place the controller in the Remote Run mode. 9. Minimize RSLogix 5000 software. 10. Open a second instance of RSLogix 5000 software. 11. Open the PC3_1756r_A2.acd file. 12. To configure the consumed tag, perform the following actions: A. Create a path by adding the producing controller in slot 1 to the I/O configuration of the project (name the controller Producing_Controller.) B. Create a tag named Slot1_Tank_Level with the following properties:
-- Select the appropriate data type to consume the data from the Tank_Level tag in the slot 1 controller.
-- Configure the Slot1_Tank_Level tag to consume the data from the Tank_Level tag in the slot 1 controller.
-- The consumed tag data must be received by the controller in slot 3 every 2 ms. 13. Download the project to the controller in slot 3. 14. Place the controller in the Remote Run mode.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PC3e56r
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
8--13
15. Verify that the data from the controller in slot 1 is being consumed by the controller in slot 3 by performing the following: Open the Controller Tags editor for the project in slot 1 and enter a value of 300 for the Tank_Level tag. Confirm that 300 is now the value of the Slot1_Tank_Level tag in the slot 3 project. 16. Go offline and close both projects.
How Did You Do?
Turn to the Answers section.
Exercise B
In this exercise, you will practice configuring Logix5000 controllers to produce and consume data from a user-define data type across the backplane. Context: To exchange interlocking data between the controllers, you must configure the controllers to produce and consume UDT data across the backplane. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the PC3_1756r_B1.acd file. 2. Configure the Controller_Status tag to be produced for 2 consumers. 3. Verify the project and correct any errors. 4. Save the project. 5. Download the project to the controller in slot 1. 6. Place the controller in Remote Run mode. 7. Minimize RSLogix 5000 software. 8. Open a second instance of RSLogix 5000 software. 9. Open the PC3_1756r_B2.acd file
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PC3e56r
8--14
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
10. To configure the consumed tag, perform the following actions: Create a path by adding the producing controller in slot 1 to the I/O configuration of the project. Copy the UDT from the producing controller and paste it into the consuming controller. Create a new tag named Slot1_Controller_Status that will consume the data from the Controller_Status tag in the slot 1 controller.
Tip "
Controller_Status is a tag that uses a user-defined data type. To be shared correctly, the UDT in the consuming controller must be set up in the same order as the UDT in the producing controller. 11. Download the project to the controller in slot 3. 12. Place the controller in the Remote Run mode. 13. Monitor the consumed tag. 14. Verify that the data from the controller in slot 1 is being consumed by the controller in slot 3.
How Did You Do?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Turn to the Answers section.
Rev. August 2012 PC3e56r
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
Rev. August 2012
8--15
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PC3e56r
8--16
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
Answers
Exercise A 2. Tags must be controller-scoped to be produced or consumed. 3. Data types that can be produced would include REAL, DINT, and user-defined data types. 4. The following configurations are required for the Tank_Level tag:
12. A. The following is an example of how the I/O Configuration should look in the slot 3 controller:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PC3e56r
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
8--17
B. The following configurations are required for the Slot1_Tank_Level tag in the slot 3 controller project:
Data Type in the Consumed tag must match Data Type in the Produced tag.
The tag name here must match the name of the produced tag in the Producing Controller.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PC3e56r
8--18
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
Exercise B 2. The following configurations are required for the Controller_Status tag:
10. You should first copy the Status UDT from the producing controller’s project into the consuming controller’s project:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PC3e56r
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
8--19
The following configurations are required for the Slot1_Controller_Status tag in the slot 3 controller project:
Data Type in the Consumed tag must match Data Type in the Produced tag.
The tag name here must match the name of the produced tag in the Producing Controller.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. PC3e56r
8--20
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 PC3e56r
Lesson
9
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network What You Will Learn Important: If this lesson is part of a national school and you are using ControlNet for remote data sharing, this lesson can be skipped.
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Add an EtherNet/IP module to an I/O configuration
Add a controller to an I/O configuration When You Will Do This Use the procedures in this lesson when you have to pass interlock data between controllers over an EtherNet/IP network.
Before You Begin
EtherNet/IP Network Overview Ethernet Network: A high speed, information network designed primarily for communications between computers and peripheral devices: Is widely accepted and has become the “defacto” standard for information networks Can be used with a wide range of devices available from many different vendors Was widely used in office networks for decades and now is used on the plant floor as well
Allows data to be easily exchanged between the plant floor and
? Who owns or controls EtherNet/IP? Answer: Technically, no one owns it; however, EtherNet/IP is a trademark of ControlNet International under license by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association).
Rev. August 2012
office networks
EtherNet/IP (Industrial Protocol) Network: An Ethernet network that uses CIP (Common Industrial Protocol) at the application layer of the OSI model, enabling interconnectivity with other networks that use CIP at the application layer. CIP (Common Industrial Protocol): The application layer of the OSI (open system interconnection) model that enables I/O control over an EtherNet/IP network. This layer also bridges EtherNet/IP devices with devices on networks such as ControlNet and DeviceNet that also use CIP at the application layer.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. ENTsb56r
9--2
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
Overview of IP Addresses Let the students know that their will be a brief discussion on private IP addresses later in this lesson.
Tell the students that every Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley Ethernet/EtherNet/IP product has a MAC address in the form 00:00:BC:XX:XX:XX. Inform the students that a device’s MAC address is also referred to as the device’s Hardware Address or Ethernet Address.
? How many possible Ethernet
devices/components can Rockwell Automation manufacture?
IP (Internet Protocol) Address: A user-defined software address assigned to a device on an Ethernet network that identifies the network and the node. An IP address is a 32-bit address that is normally grouped into 4 bytes for ease of communication and understanding (e.g., 10.88.244.130). MAC (Media Access Control) Address: A static address that is factory-assigned to an Ethernet and/or EtherNet/IP device. This address is a unique 6-byte address - each digit is a hex number -- that is embedded in the circuitry of every device that is on an EtherNet/IP network:
MAC Address (also referred to as a module’s Ethernet address)
Answer: 166 (=16,777,216).
IP addresses are easy-to-use and remember notations for the user to employ in communication networks: Devices use their hardware addresses to communicate with each other.
Each device converts its hardware address to an IP address before it transmits a message on the network. As devices communicate with each other, they store information in their memory that identifies a hardware device with its IP address.
Ethernet networks support many different types of protocols, including TCP/IP: TCP/IP is not limited to an EtherNet/IP network. EtherNet/IP addresses are used to communicate between devices on different protocols.
The different protocols that devices use to communicate on are transparent to the user at the network layer of the OSI model.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 ENTsb56r
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
Inform students that they should obtain a list of available private IP addresses from their IT department before randomly using one. The ability to reuse an IP number extends between different enterprises but not necessarily within a subnet.
9--3
Private IP Addresses There are a finite number of IP addresses that have been designated as private IP addresses. The private IP addresses prohibit message traffic from being routed to the Internet thereby avoiding conflicts that would otherwise arise whenever two or more enterprises used the same IP address: Class
Private IP Addresses
A
10.0.0.0 -- 10.255.255.255
B
172.16.0.0 -- 172.31.255.255
C
192.168.0.0 -- 192.168.255.255
The advantages of using private IP addresses include: Readily available for anyone to use at anytime (i.e., you do not need to register these addresses or obtain approval from an Internet registry prior to implementing them)
Simultaneous usage by multiple companies thereby allowing
users to create their own private network Easily expandable number of networks and end devices a user can employ (thereby addressing the concern of having an insufficient number of IP addresses) Inform the students that they will be shown how to identify if two devices are on the same network later in this lesson. This section may confuse your students. Network administrators are often stymied by this topic. If pressed for additional information, refer them to the Internet. Entering the terms subnet or subnet mask into their favorite search engine will reward them with a plethora of information. The search results will provide them background information, subnet calculators, and web and classroom learning opportunities.
Subnets and Subnet Masks Subnet Mask: An address that enables distinction between networks by “masking” IP address bits that denote the same network and “exposing” bits that denote different networks: Networks are often divided up into smaller units called subnets. Network administrators create subnets as a management tool:
-- Routes packets to the appropriate subnetwork based on IP addresses -- Easier to monitor the health of the entire network -- Minimizes effort required to troubleshoot and isolate problems -- Capable of isolating users based on: -- Geography -- Departments -- Media protocols -- Communication needs (e.g., plant floor I/O vs office email). Plant environment communications benefit when plant floor communications operate on a separate subnet from the office communications:
-- Accommodates timeliness of operations -- Enhances system maintenance and upgrade options -- Adds levels of security. Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. ENTsb56r
9--4
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
? How would using subnets on a plant
floor assist your company’s operations? Answer: Subnets would make it possible to isolate different plant floor operations (e.g., welding, milling) from each other and from the office/administrative systems. This allows one operation to be shut down without directly impacting the whole plant. Subnets will reduce the risk of security threats (e.g., Trojan horse attacks).
? How many of you have ever
programmed an MVM instruction? How does it work?
Subnet masks allow for two devices to determine whether or not they exist on the same subnet: If two devices are on the same subnet, they are able to communicate directly with one another.
If two devices are on different subnets, the data must first be sent
to a router before the targeted device receives the data sent by the source device.
How a Subnet Mask Operates A subnet mask, like an IP address, is a 32-bit address that is normally grouped into 4 bytes for ease of communication and understanding:
Typical Subnet Mask Inform the students that a subnet mask operates in a manner similar to an MVM 255.255.XXX.XXX instruction; hopefully they will be able to translate some of that familiarity when identifying if two IP addresses are on the same subnet. Binary Equivalent: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . x x x x x x x x . x x x x x x x x Consecutive “1’s” Represent Network Portion of IP Address
A subnet mask uses the “1’s” to do a bit-by-bit comparison of two IP addresses to see if the devices associated with the IP address are on the same subnet: As long as the IP address bits match each other (independent of the subnet mask value) whenever there is a corresponding “1” in the subnet mask, the devices are on the same subnet.
If the network portions: -- Match up, the devices communicate directly with each other. -- Don’t match up, they are on separate networks and then communicate through a router (commonly referred to as a gateway). Example Compare the EtherNet/IP addresses of two devices and determine if they are on the same subnet: EtherNet/IP Address: 165.88.73.129 EtherNet/IP Address: 165.88.74.187 Subnet Mask: 255.255.240.0
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 ENTsb56r
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
9--5
Converting these decimal values to their binary equivalent yields: EtherNet/IP Address: 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 . 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 . 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 EtherNet/IP Address: 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 . 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 . 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 Subnet Mask: 11111111.11111111.11110000.00000000
Corresponding bits match each other; therefore, these two devices are on the same subnet.
Compare the same two EtherNet/IP addresses of two devices using a different subnet mask and determine if they are on the same subnet: EtherNet/IP Address: 165.88.73.129 EtherNet/IP Address: 165.88.74.187 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Converting these decimal values to their binary equivalent yields: EtherNet/IP Address: 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 . 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 . 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 EtherNet/IP Address: 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 . 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 . 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 Subnet Mask: 11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000
Corresponding bits do not match each other; therefore, these two devices are not on the same subnet.
? What are some reasons you may
want to expand your network? Contract it? Answer: Isolate devices, processes, and enhance security. Limiting the number of subnets you have increases the likelihood that two devices can communicate directly with each other. This may reduce the number of routers you must purchase, maintain, and monitor. Gateways are glorified routers that control the flow of data between external networks and an enterprise’s internal network.
As demonstrated by these examples, it is possible to expand (or contract) the network environment by changing the subnet masks associated with the devices on a network. Gateways Gateways: Nodes on a network that act as entrance and exit portals between external networks: Data packets being shared between internal and external devices must pass-through at least one gateway in establishing communications.
Gateways often act as a firewall and protect the resources of a private network from users from other networks.
Gateways may have more than one IP address associated with them -- one for internal users and one for external users.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. ENTsb56r
9--6
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
Default Gateway: The router (gateway) to which all remote packets must be sent in order to be routed to their final destination (i.e., if two devices are not on the same network, the packet will be sent to the gateway). Gateway Address: The IP address of a device’s default gateway.
Configuration Overview and Software Interfaces Note that this section is a general introduction to the flow of configuration procedures. The step-by-step details and software demonstrations will be presented in the Here’s How section. If this lesson is part of a national school, add that remote I/O will be discussed in a different lesson. Encourage students to ask any remaining questions from the Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data lesson.
To share data across an EtherNet/IP network, it is necessary to complete the following procedures: 1. Create the required produced tag. 2. In the controller that is consuming the data, perform the following actions: A. Add the local EtherNet/IP module to the I/O configuration. B. Add the remote EtherNet/IP module to the I/O configuration. C. Add the producing controller to the I/O configuration. D. Create the required consumed tags.
Note that the controller was also added to the project to share data when producing and consuming tags across the backplane. However, the controller is now added under the remote ENBT. Add that it is not necessary or even possible to add the controller running the project to the configuration.
Adding an EtherNet/IP Module and Controller to an I/O Configuration The following graphic is an example of a remote EtherNet/IP module and remote controller added to an I/O configuration in RSLogix 5000 software:
Local EtherNet/IP Module Remote EtherNet/IP Module Remote (Producing) Controller
Produced and Consumed Tags Note that the produced and consumed tags are created just as they were created for transfers over the backplane. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Data that is shared over an EtherNet/IP network must be transferred using produced tags and received (stored) in consumed tags. Rev. August 2012 ENTsb56r
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
Here’s How
9--7
To perform the following tasks: Add an EtherNet/IP module to an I/O configuration Add a controller to an I/O configuration Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the steps below to help guide you during the demonstration: Be sure to use the CCP143_1756R_DEM6.acd file and CCP143_1756R_DEM7.acd file. When demonstrating the listed procedures, be sure to point out the following items:
Rev. August 2012
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
Parent--child relationship of the EtherNet/IP and the controller that you add to the I/O configuration
-
Produced and consumed tags that you create
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. ENTsb56r
9--8
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 ENTsb56r
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
9--9
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice configuring a local Logix5000 controller to share data with a remote Logix5000 controller over an EtherNet/IP network. Context: You have finished programming and testing a complete project for a production line. To increase productivity, the plant has set up a second production line. The second production line needs to receive (consume) the Pressure data from the first assembly line over an EtherNet/IP network.
Production Line 2
Production Line 1
EtherNet/IP Network Consumed
n Produced
In this exercise, you will share data with the other workstation on your EtherNet/IP network. One controller will produce data and the other will consume the data. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the ENT_1756r_A1.acd file (the producer controller.) 2. Create a user-defined data type called Station_Data that will store the following information from the local controller:
Rev. August 2012
Member
Data type
Description
AI0
REAL
Analog Input channel 0
AI1
REAL
Analog Input channel 1
DI
DINT
Digital Inputs
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. ENTe56r
9--10
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
3. Create a controller scoped tag called Local_Station_Data with the following properties: Uses the Station_Data data type Produced for 1 controller 4. Enter ladder logic to copy your analog channel 0 data and channel 1 data as well as your discrete input data to the respective members of the Local_Station_Data tag. 5. Verify the project, correct any errors, and download the project to the local controller in slot 1. 6. Place the controller in slot 1 in Remote Run mode. 7. Open the ENT_1756r_A2.acd file (the consumer controller.)
Tip "
This project will be downloaded to the controller in slot 3 of the remote workstation after you have completed the configuration. 8. Add the following modules to the I/O configuration (review workstation configuration for appropriate IP addresses): A. Add the local (relative to the project’s controller) EtherNet/IP module to the I/O configuration. B. Nested under the local EtherNet/IP module, add the remote EtherNet/IP module to the I/O configuration. C. Nested under the remote EtherNet/IP module, add the controller in slot 1 of the remote workstation to the I/O configuration and call it Producer_Controller. 9. Copy the Station_Data UDT from the ENT_1756r_A1 project file into the ENT_1756r_A2 project file. 10. Consume the Local_Station_Data tag from the Producer_Controller by performing the following actions: Create a controller scoped tag called Remote_Station_Data that uses the Station_Data data type. Configure Remote_Station_Data as a consumed tag with a rate of 100 ms. 11. Enter ladder logic to copy the Remote_Station_Data tag to your analog channel 0 and analog channel 1 outputs. 12. Write the logic so that each of the green buttons pushed on your workstation will light the corresponding light on the remote workstation. 13. Verify the project, correct any errors, and download the project to the remote consumer controller in slot 3.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 ENTe56r
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
9--11
14. To verify that each production line is correctly configured to share data, complete the following actions: A. Verify that moving your analog channel 0 to the middle position moves the analog channel 0 meter on the remote workstation to its middle position. B. Verify that moving your analog channel 1 to the middle position moves the analog channel 1 meter on the remote workstation to its middle position. C. Verify that pushing the first four discrete buttons on your workstation light the corresponding lights on the remote workstation.
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. ENTe56r
9--12
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
Answers
Exercise A 2. The user-defined data type should look similar to the following example:
3. The tag created should look similar to the following example:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 ENTe56r
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
9--13
4. Your ladder logic should look similar to the following example:
8. The I/O configuration should look similar to the following example:
9. The Station_Data UDT should now be found in the EN2_1756r_A2 project:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. ENTe56r
9--14
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
10. The consumed tag should look similar to the following example:
11. Your ladder logic should look similar to the following example:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 ENTe56r
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
9--15
12. Your ladder logic should look similar to the following example:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. ENTe56r
9--16
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over an EtherNet/IP Network
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 ENTe56r
Lesson
10
Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to add a remote 1756-I/O module to an I/O configuration for communication over an EtherNet/IP network.
When You Will Do This Just like with local modules, you can add remote I/O modules at any point in your development process. Have students find their procedures guide and use it for the steps below. Give them a few minutes to read the procedures guide. Point out that in this lesson you’ll manually add remote modules.
Before You Begin Have students find the manual and use it for the steps below. Give them a few minutes to read the guidelines.
Reference: RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide 1. Find the Adding a Local or Remote 1756--I/O Module to an I/O Configuration procedure in your procedures guide. 2. Briefly read the Get Ready steps.
Effect of RPI on EtherNet/IP Communication Reference: Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations, 1756--RM094 1. Go to the Communication with I/O chapter. 2. Go to the Guidelines to Specify an RPI Rate for I/O Modules section. 3. Notice the guideline on how RPI affects change--of--state communication over an EtherNet/IP network.
Point out that this also applies to the RTS of an analog module.
Rev. August 2012
Example: Effect of RPI on EtherNet/IP Communication If a digital input module uses an RPI = 100 ms, the EtherNet/IP module sends module data immediately on receiving it if another data packet was not sent within the last 25 ms.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. RI2sb56r
10--2
Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network
Communications Formats Give students a few minutes to read the benefits and considerations of each, and then ask the questions.
Reference: Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations, 1756--RM094 1. Go to the Communication Formats for I/O Modules section. 2. Briefly read the benefits and considerations of direct and rack--optimized connections. Question: Which type of connection uses more network resources? Question: What is the advantage of a rack--optimized connection?
Point out that you can still have direct connections with modules even if the chassis has a rack--optimized connection.
Here’s How Give students a few minutes to read the guidelines.
Question: Which type of connection do you need to use if you want diagnostic data from a module? To decide which rack connection setting to use. Reference: Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations, 1756--RM094 1. Go to the Guidelines to Manage I/O Connections section. 2. Briefly look over the I/O Connection Guidelines. Example: No Rack Connection Suppose you have a remote 17--slot chassis with these modules: 1 EtherNet/IP module
15 analog input or output modules 1 digital input module In this case, set the remote EtherNet/IP module’s Rack Connection setting to None. Choose a direct connection format when you configure each I/O module.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 RI2sb56r
Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network
10--3
Example: Rack--optimized Connection Suppose you have a remote 10--slot chassis with these modules: 1 EtherNet/IP module 1 analog input module
1 fused output module 5 non--diagnostic digital input modules 2 non--fused digital output modules In this case, set the remote EtherNet/IP module’s Rack Connection setting to Rack Optimization. Choose a direct connection format for each analog and fused output module. Choose a rack--optimized format for the rest of the modules. Have each student do this on their own. Then go over the answers as a group.
Activity: For each situation below, decide which rack connection setting to use and check the appropriate box:
Situation
None
Rack Connection setting Rack None Optimization
A. Remote 10--slot chassis with: 1 EtherNet/IP module 2 analog input modules 6 diagnostic digital input modules 2 non--fused diagnostic output modules
Rack Optimization
B. Remote 13--slot chassis with: 1 EtherNet/IP module 2 analog input modules 7 non--diagnostic digital input modules 3 non--fused diagnostic output modules
Rack Optimization
C. Remote 13--slot chassis with: 2 EtherNet/IP modules 6 non--diagnostic digital input modules 3 non--fused diagnostic output modules 2 empty slots for future expansion
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. RI2sb56r
10--4
Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network
Here’s How IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids.
To manually add a remote 1756-I/O module to an I/O configuration for communication over an EtherNet/IP network. Reference: RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide Talk your instructor through the steps in your procedures guide while he or she demonstrates them.
To demonstrate: 1. Continue with either the CCP143_1756R_DEM6.acd file or CCP143_1756R_DEM7.acd project. 2. Have students talk you through adding a remote module using a direct connection. 3. Have students talk you through adding a remote module using a rack optimization connection.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Tag names of the data for the remote module
-
Rack Connection setting of the remote EtherNet/IP module if you want a rack--optimized connection
-
You must be offline to change the Rack Connection setting of the remote EtherNet/IP module.
-
The software automatically creates alias tags for the packet of rack optimization data.
Rev. August 2012 RI2sb56r
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network
10--5
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice configuring a Logix5000 controller to communicate with a 1756-remote I/O module over an EtherNet/IP network. Context: You have programmed a complete project. As a safety feature for plant personnel, you want to program an output light to be on when the production line is active. Because you have used your available I/O points in the local chassis, you must add a remote chassis to accommodate the additional I/O requirements. You are now ready to configure the controller to communicate with the 1756-remote I/O module over an Ethernet I/P network. The setup of the remote output is shown in the following graphic: Production Line Active
Local Chassis
Ethernet I/P Network
Remote Chassis
When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Download the Blank.acd file to the controller in slot 3. 2. Open the RI2_1756r_A1.acd file. 3. Add the local and remote EtherNet/IP modules to the project I/O configuration (review your workstation configuration for the appropriate IP address.) 4. Add and configure the remote output module in slot 4. 5. Add the local input module that is in slot 2 to your I/O configuration. You will also be owning this module.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. RI2e56r
10--6
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network
6. Make a new tag, DI12, an alias tag for bit 12 of the local digital input card in slot 2. 7. Make a new tag, DO11, an alias tag for bit 11 of the the remote digital output card in slot 4 8. Enter the following ladder logic in your MainRoutine:
9. Download the project to the controller in slot 1 of the local chassis. 10. Test the project and verify that you have correctly configured the remote I/O by performing the following actions: A. Start the conveyor by energizing workstation label DI12. B. Verify that the remote I/O light DO11 on the other workstation is on. C. Turn off DI12 and verify that the remote I/O light on the other workstation is off. D. When the project functions correctly, go offline.
How Did You Do?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Turn to the Answers section.
Rev. August 2012 RI2e56r
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network
Rev. August 2012
10--7
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. RI2e56r
10--8
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network
Answers
Exercise A 3. Your main configuration screen for the local EtherNet/IP module in slot 6 should look similar to the example (The module’s IP address will vary depending on your workstation setup.):
The remote EtherNet/IP module is added to the I/O Configuration by right-clicking the Ethernet network icon displayed below the local EtherNet/IP module:
(Continued)
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 RI2e56r
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network
10--9
Your main configuration screen for the remote EtherNet/IP module in slot 6 should look similar to the example (The module’s IP address will vary depending on your workstation setup.):
4. Add the remote output module by right-clicking the backplane displayed beneath the remote EtherNet/IP module:
Your main configuration screen for the remote output module in slot 4 should look similar to the example:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. RI2e56r
10--10
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module over an EtherNet/IP Network
5. Your main configuration screen for the local input module in slot 2 should look similar to the example:
Your completed I/O Configuration within the Controller Organizer should look similar to the following:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 RI2e56r
Lesson
11
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to create an event task in an RSLogix 5000 project.
When You Will Do This Use an event task when you have logic you want to execute whenever a specific condition occurs.
Before You Begin
Task Type Review A task triggers the execution of its scheduled programs. The following table outlines the type of tasks that are available:
If students are familiar with other controllers, relate the event task to a PII (PLC) or DII (SLC) task.
Rev. August 2012
Task Type
Usage
Continuous
A task that runs continuously but can be interrupted by periodic or event tasks.
Periodic
A task that executes regularly at a user-specified rate. When called, it will interrupt any lower priority tasks.
Event
A task that is triggered only when a specific event occurs. When called, it will interrupt any lower priority tasks.
Icon
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTsb56r
11--2
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Event Task Note that the fastest or shortest task will not necessarily be the highest priority. In the graphic, point out that an event task icon has a forward arrow because the task executes once based on a certain conditional event. Also, note that like a continuous task or periodic task, an event task contains programs, tags, and routines.
An event task is a task that performs a certain function only when triggered by a specified event: Each task is assigned a trigger.
Each task is assigned a priority level. When triggered, the event
task interrupts any lower priority tasks (other event, continuous, or periodic tasks).
Once initiated, all programs assigned to the event task are executed or scanned once from top to bottom.
Upon completion, control returns to the task that was interrupted, at the point in which it was interrupted.
Benefits
Note that event tasks can provide an alternate, more effective way of balancing the need for high-speed processing with CPU performance.
Event tasks offer the following benefits: Improve performance and reduce costs because tasks execute only when needed Reduce the amount of code a controller must scan on a regular basis
Free up CPU resources for other operations Provide faster throughput and improved loop-closure times, which translate to higher production output
Tip "
Like a continuous or periodic task, event tasks require at least one program and one routine. Event Task Use Event tasks are selected for processes that should only run when needed, typically on an infrequent basis. Perform an operation when a part is rejected
Execute a process when a certain count or time is achieved
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EVTsb56r
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
11--3
Example: Project Organization Note that this project takes advantage of some of the Logix5000 organizational elements.
In this example, the event task is triggered only when the packing tape is low:
Event Task
Event Task Properties In the graphic, point out that the trigger option is where the user chooses how the event task will be enabled. Tell students that this means event tasks will only execute if the required trigger has occurred.
The properties for each event task determine when the task is executed:
Enables the Task Specific Data for Triggers such as Consumed Tag Data Arrival or 1756 Module Input State Change Timeout Value
All other properties are the same as those for periodic tasks.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTsb56r
11--4
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Trigger The following triggers can initiate an event task:
Note that the Motion Group Execution event task permits a specialized algorithm to be synchronized with the motion group processing. Since the planner is always a higher priority than the event task, this event always occurs when the planner is complete. This allows you to use specialized control algorithms to override the normal motion loop processing.
Note that a physical device determines the location and triggers Axis Registration tasks on the off-to-on transition of these inputs.
To triggers an event task when . . .
Select this trigger type . . .
A consumed tag changed value or its sequence count just changed
Consumed Data State Change
COS input data on an input module has changed or its sequence count changed
Module Input Data State Change
An event instruction goes true
EVENT instruction only " This code specifies the task to trigger. It is programmed outside of the event task.
The motion planner executed
Motion Group Execution
The high speed registration input 1 on the motion card or drive has fired trapping the current axis position
Axis Registration 1
The high speed registration input 2 on the motion card or drive has fired trapping the current axis position
Axis Registration 2
The axis has crossed the assigned watch position. A watch point is a software-based position that serves as the trigger for the event
Axis Watch
The triggers that are supported depend on the controller type.
Multiple controllers can simultaneously consume the same produced tag.
This technique lets you use smaller, more modular controllers in flexible manufacturing cells. You can reconfigure the cells while avoiding the interlock-wiring issues that would otherwise exist.
Consumed Tag Because a controller produces and consumes data asynchronous to the execution of its control program, the program may begin processing with a mixture of old and new data. Event tasks provide a way to synchronize data exchange to ensure that a consuming controller receives all of the data before processing begins: After the producing controller loads the data into its produced tag, the controller initiates an IOT (immediate output) instruction.
The consuming controller simply configures an event task to look for the trigger via the consumed tag.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EVTsb56r
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
11--5
This technique provides the following advantages: Automates the data detection processing for the consumer Eliminates complex handshaking code
Improves the transfer rate Coordinates the operations of multiple controllers in a distributed system
? For digital modules, what is the
difference between RPI and COS? The RPI sends data at a pre-configured rate. COS sends data from a digital input when the module has detected that changes have occurred (off-to-on, on-to-off, or both). When any point configured for COS changes state, the module multicasts its data for all points.
Tip "
?For analog modules, what is the difference between RPI and RTS? RTS (Real Time Sample Rate) specifies when an analog module scans its channels and multicasts data.
Example: Module input data state change is valuable for applications such as packaging and material handling, where detection of a package by an input sensor must be processed quickly to drive an output solenoid to manipulate or divert product. Poll the class to find out who is using remote I/O in their application.
Initiates code in the distributed controllers (consumers) based on an event in a master controller (producer):
-- Eliminates data change detection overhead -- Simplifies programming Module Input Data State Change Certain 1756 input modules support module input state change. Refer to your module documentation for details. Upon receipt of the information from a module, the controller initiates the event task and executes the application code: Saves valuable execution time by avoiding the need for the controller to poll the inputs and perform COS (change-of-state) detection
Captures and processes multiple events without additional CPU overhead
1756 Local and Remote Options Remote input modules can be used to trigger an event: Input modules used to initiate an event task are generally in the same chassis as the controller that needs to respond to the event.
Input modules can be placed in a remote chassis connected via a
ControlNet or EtherNet/IP network. The associated communications module connecting the remote I/O must support input events.
Point out that for many applications, the benefit of reducing the CPU loading overrides the need for speed.
Each network adds additional delays.
Quick-Response Events Example: A packaging line requires a label each time a product is detected. Because of the speed with which product moves by the labeler, an event task is the only way to guarantee that every load is detected and labeled.
Quick-Response Event: The delay between the input change and the control of an output must be minimized: Controls an output based on receipt of an input Isolates code to ensure that execution is not impacted by long continuous task scan times
Works for applications such as material handling, packaging, gluing
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTsb56r
11--6
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Short-Duration Input Events With a short-duration event, the input could change state once and then change back again faster than the normal scan of the continuous or periodic task.
Example: In a bottling line, a sensor detects an improperly capped bottle that must be rejected. Because of the high speed of the line, an event task is the only way to detect the reject and respond to it.
Short-Duration Input Event: An input whose duration is shorter than the normal scan of the controller but the event does not occur very often. For short-duration input events, an event task performs the following: Executes an operation based on a short-duration (pulsed) input
Ensures capture of inputs that turn on and off faster than the continuous task scan time
Works for applications such as encoder inputs, position sensing, proximity devices
Synchronized-Execution Event Example: Synchronized-execution event tasks work for applications such as packaging, process loops, drive control loops
Synchronized-Execution Event: Typically used with analog data, where the arrival of new data triggers an operation: Each analog module has its own internal sample period for converting analog input signals to digital floating values.
An asynchronous loop can exist between the receipt of new input values and the execution of the code for the loop.
This discrepancy means that PID calculations execute with stale data, which could result in calculation errors.
With an event task, you can synchronize the PID calculation to the arrival of flow transmitter data to avoid this potential error. Throughput depends on module type, input voltage, module temperature, filter and response time settings, backplane size and loading, and controller type.
Single Bit Triggers A task can be triggered on a single bit change even when the task configuration level is for the entire input module: 1. Access the Change of State options for the input module. 2. Select only the bit transition you want to trigger the event. By default all transitions are enabled. 3. If there is more than one transition you want to monitor, use code in the event task to find out what changed. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EVTsb56r
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
11--7
Change of State options are found on the Configuration tab of the Module Properties dialog box:
Sends Data When the Input Changes from Off to On and On to Off
Module Input Data State Change -- Design Considerations
At the time of printing, the modules with the best response times are 1756-IB32/B digital module and 1756-IF4FXOF2F analog module.
The following checklist will help you efficiently use input triggers: - Limit the number of other modules that are in the same chassis as the event module and controller. Additional modules increase the potential for backplane delays. - For digital inputs, restrict the triggering input to a single point on the module. Disable COS for the other points. When you enable COS, all inputs on the module trigger a single event, increasing the chance of a task overlap. - In general, set the priority of your event task as the highest priority. - Increasing the number of event tasks increases the load on the CPU, increasing the chance of a task overlap. - Choose modules with the best current response times.
Automatic Output Processing Review the wording of this option. Selecting it will actually disable (not enable) automatic output processing.
Rev. August 2012
To reduce task overhead, verify the disable automatic output processing . . . option is selected and use an IOT instruction in a routine.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTsb56r
11--8
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Priority
If you already covered this topic in the Periodic Task lesson, briefly review it here.
Each periodic and event task in a controller has a priority level that determines which task executes when multiple tasks are triggered: Priorities are assigned by the user.
There are 15 levels of priority, with 1 being the highest priority
and 15 being the lowest: -- A task with a higher priority will execute first (i.e., 1 before 3)
Clarify that the lower number (1) gives the task a higher priority or importance. Note that the fastest or shortest task will not necessarily be the highest priority.
Task priorities are relative: -- If there are only three tasks, priorities of 6, 7, and 8 will
Clarify that this means the continuous task automatically has the lowest priority. A user cannot configure the priority for a continuous task.
function the same as priorities of 1, 2, and 3. Although no priority level is assigned, the motion task is always the highest priority. Although no priority level is assigned, the continuous task is always one priority level lower than all other tasks:
Highest Priority
Motion Task Trend
Point out that periodic and event tasks use the same priority scale/levels. Therefore, whichever task has the highest priority executes first, regardless of the task type.
Event or Periodic Task - Priority 1 . . . Event or Periodic Task - Priority 5 . . . Event or Periodic Task - Priority 10 . . . Event or Periodic Task - Priority 15 . . . Lowest Priority
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Continuous Task
Rev. August 2012 EVTsb56r
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
If you already covered this topic in the Periodic Task lesson, briefly review it here.
11--9
Scan Time Values When executing, the software displays the maximum scan time and the last scan time in milliseconds for the selected task in the Task properties dialog box:
Online Properties Length of Execution
Event Task Timeout Setting this option will trigger a task within a specified period of time if the required event does not occur: This timer is reset and started when the task is completed. This is not the same as a periodic task. These instructions are explained on the following pages. For more detailed information on how these instructions impact event tasks, see the online Help.
Event Instructions The following instructions impact event tasks: IOT (Immediate Output) UID/UIE (User Interrupt Disable/Enable)
CPS (Copy Synchronize)
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTsb56r
11--10
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
IOT Instruction An IOT instruction causes a value to be sent immediately, thus improving response latency: Can operate on a produced tag or an output module tag
Causes value to be sent, thus improving response latency Avoids having to wait for another RPI to initiate an output update On a produced tag, permits you to trigger a task in the consuming controller:
Triggers the Task in the Consumer
UID/UIE Instructions These instructions work together to prevent a small number of critical rungs from being interrupted by other tasks: UID instruction prevents higher-priority tasks from interrupting the current task but does not disable execution of a fault routine or the Controller Fault Handler.
UIE instruction enables other tasks to interrupt the current task:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EVTsb56r
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
11--11
CPS Instruction This instruction is considered part of the File/Misc. group of instructions. It can be found on the File tab of the Language Elements toolbar.
The CPS instruction copies the value(s) in the Source to the values in the Destination: Performs double buffering of values and manages interrupts/event tasks:
-- Operation cannot be interrupted by another task. Reduces the need for application handshaking Avoids mixture of old/new data
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTsb56r
11--12
Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Here’s How
To create an event task. Activity: As your instructor demonstrates this procedure, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the CCP143_1756r_DEM2.acd project during the demonstration.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedure in the job aid
-
Trigger for the event task
-
Timeout option
-
Automatic output processing option
Rev. August 2012 EVTsb56r
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
11--13
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice the basic steps for creating an event task. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the EVT_1756r_A1.acd project. 2. Create a new Event task with the following properties: Name: Alarms Trigger: EVENT Instruction Only Priority: 5 Watchdog: 100 ms 3. Add the unscheduled Alarm_Control program to your new Event task’s program schedule. 4. Open the MainRoutine within the MainProgram of the Continuous task. 5. Create a rung of ladder that will momentarily trigger execution of the Alarms Event task when DI12 (Local:2:I.Data.12, program-scoped tag) is enabled. 6. Save your project. 7. Verify you correctly configured your Event task by performing the following: A. Download the project to the controller in slot 1. B. Change the controller operating mode to Remote Run. C. Toggle selector switch DI12 and confirm the output lights on your workstation begin to flash. 8. Close your project.
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTe56r
11--14
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Exercise B
In this exercise, you will practice creating an event task. Context: The width of the roll of tape used in the palletizing station is measured by an optical sensor. Two alarms must be generated for the operator when the tape is below a certain width. On the standard workstation, these inputs and outputs appear as shown:
Active Only When Tape is Low
DI12
DI13
DI14
DI15
When on (right), DI15 indicates that the tape is low.
When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the EVT_1756r_B1.acd project. 2. Download this project to the controller in slot 1. 3. Change the controller operating mode to Remote Run. 4. Minimize the project.
Tip "
The assembly stations are now running. 5. Open the EVT_1756r_B2.acd project. 6. Configure the local input module to enable change of state (COS) for bit 15 when it transitions from off to on. 7. Create a new event task named Tape_Low that will trigger when DI15 (Local:2:I.Data.15) is turned on:
Configure the new task’s trigger to be data state change from the local input module Local:2:I. The existing periodic task has a priority level of 5. Your new event task is more critical than the Clean_Conveyor task. Configure the tasks priority to meet this requirement.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EVTe56r
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
11--15
8. In the space below, list your tasks from highest priority to lowest priority according to the values assigned:
Tip "
So far, this is a simple application with only a few short tasks and little task overhead. 9. In the event task, create a new program named Low_Tape_Alarms. 10. Create a ladder diagram routine named Alarm_Control within the program. 11. Assign Alarm_Control as the main routine of the Low_Tape_Alarms program. 12. Make the controller-scoped tag Alarm_1 an alias for Local:4:O.Data.10. 13. Make the controller-scoped tag Alarm_2 an alias for Local:4:O.Data.11. 14. Enter the ladder logic to enable two alarm lights when the task is active: Alarm_1 and Alarm_2. Put these on an unconditional rung. 15. Save your project. Before performing Step 16., turn the bottom row of inputs (selector switches) off (to the left).
16. Check the operation of this event task by performing the following steps:
Tip "
Two outputs (DO10 and DO11) should turn on as a visual indication that the event occurred and the task was scanned. The task should be scanned only when the tape is low (DI15 = 1). A. Download your file to the controller in slot 3. B. Change the controller operating mode to Remote Run. C. On the workstation, start your conveyor by pressing the start button (workstation label DI0).
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTe56r
11--16
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
D. A low tape measurement has not yet been indicated. Did outputs DO10 and DO11 turn on?
E. Enable any of the other pushbuttons or switches (except DI15). F. Did DO10 and DO11 turn on?
G. To indicate that the width of the tape is now low, set DI15 to the right. H. Did DO10 and DO11 turn on?
How Did You Do?
Turn to the Answers section.
Exercise C
In this exercise, you will practice creating an event task and configuring an event instruction. Context: According to the functional specification, a task is required that will inform the operator when a high percentage (3%) of the total parts has been rejected. On the standard workstation, these inputs and outputs appear as shown: Reject Alarm (Flashes Only When Percentage of Rejected Parts is Greater than or Equal to 3)
When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the EVT_1756r_C1.acd project. 2. Download this project to the controller in slot 1. 3. Change the controller operating mode to Remote Run. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EVTe56r
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Tip "
11--17
The assembly stations are now running. 4. Minimize the project. 5. Open the EVT_1756r_C2.acd project. 6. Open MainRoutine of the Station_4_Quality program in the Quality task. Look over rung 4. This is the rung that evaluates the percent of rejected parts.
Contains the percent of rejects created.
7. Create a new event task named Reject_Percent that is triggered by an Event instruction. This task is higher priority than the periodic task. 8. Create a program in the task that will group the data and code related to the reject alarms. Name the program Reject_Alarms. 9. Create and assign a main routine named Alarm_Control. 10. Enter ladder logic that will enable the alarm light DO6 (Local:4:O:Data.6) when the task is scanned. If you have time, make the alarm light flash. 11. Turn off DI12, DI13, DI14, and DI15 on the workstation. 12. After the task is set up, enter the code necessary to enable the task when the Percent_Rejected tag value is greater than or equal to 3. Enter this logic in the Station_4_Quality MainRoutine, rung 5. 13. Download this project to the controller in slot 3. 14. Set both analog inputs to 0 in order to create poor quality parts. 15. Change the controller operating mode to Remote Run. 16. On the workstation, start your conveyor by pressing the start button (DI0). 17. To introduce a new part into the system, toggle the part sensor switch (DI12) from left to right and then back to left. You will see the first assembly station, Press, is active (DO3).
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTe56r
11--18
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
18. When the station light (DO3) is off, toggle the part sensor switch from left to right and then back to left. Now there are two parts moving down the conveyor. You will see two stations, Press and Stake active (DO3 and DO4). 19. When both station lights are off, toggle the part sensor switch (DI12) from left to right and then back to left. Now you will see all three assembly stations Press, Stake, and Weld, activate.
Tip "
When the first part has reached station four it will be evaluated for quality. A part will be rejected if the pressure values are out of range (40% to 60% is acceptable). 20. Monitor the ladder logic that you entered to enable the event task.
Tip "
This ladder logic should be in the main routine of the Station_4_Quality program in the Quality task.
Tip "
As soon as the Parts_Rejected value is greater than or equal to 3, the reject light will be enabled/flashing. 21. Continue to toggle selector switch DI12 as the Press, Stake, and Weld lights go off until the reject light (DO6) is flashing or on. 22. Go offline with the controller and close the project.
How Did You Do?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Turn to the Answers section.
Rev. August 2012 EVTe56r
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Rev. August 2012
11--19
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTe56r
11--20
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Answers
Exercise A 2. Your task should contain the following information:
3. Your Alarms task program schedule should now look similar to the following:
5. Your rung of logic should look similar to the following example:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EVTe56r
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
11--21
Exercise B 6. Your Enable Change of State options should look like the following example:
Sends Data When the DI15 Changes from Off to On.
7. Your task should contain the following information:
The input module is identified. This task is more important than the others; therefore, it has a lower priority number. The task takes approximately 45 ms to execute, so the watchdog timer value is set to 100 ms.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTe56r
11--22
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
8. The tasks have the following priorities:
Tape_Low is the most important task. It should have a priority value of 4 or less.
The Clean_Conveyors task has a priority value of 5. The Continuous task automatically has the lowest priority. 9. Your program should contain the following information:
10. Your routine should contain the following information:
15. The logic you created should look similar to the following:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EVTe56r
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
11--23
16. D. No, outputs DO10 and DO11 did not turn on. F. No, outputs DO10 and DO11 did not turn on. H. Yes, outputs DO10 and DO11 did turn on.
Exercise C 7. Your task should contain the following information:
With this trigger, there is no tag required.
8. Your program should contain the following information:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTe56r
11--24
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
9. Your routine should contain the following information:
Tip "
Any routine type could be used. 10. The following ladder logic will flash the alarm light when the task is enabled. To simply turn the alarm light on without flashing it, program rung 1 only, without the input instruction:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EVTe56r
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
11--25
12. The following code will enable the task when the Percent_Rejected value is more than (or equal to) 3:
Static Value
Rev. August 2012
Program Control Instruction
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. EVTe56r
11--26
Exercise: Creating an Event Task in an RSLogix 5000 Project
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 EVTe56r
Lesson
12
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Retrieve and set a controller status value using GSV (Get System Value) and SSV (Set System Value) instructions Assign a fault routine
When You Will Do This Poll students to see how many of them are familiar with PLC-5 or SLC 500 status files.
Before You Begin Poll students to see how many of them are familiar with PLC-5 or SLC 500 status files. Add that by removing the status files, the controller can perform more efficiently because it does not have to update status files when it is not required. Point out that these instructions are not available in function block diagram or sequential function chart languages.
Mention that by default, the GSV and SSV instructions are part of the Input/Output tab on the RSLogix 5000 Instruction toolbar.
Rev. August 2012
With Logix5000 controllers, you use GSV and SSV instructions to access controller status values.
Monitoring Controller System Data Unlike other controllers, a Logix5000 controller does not constantly monitor controller system data and update status files. A Logix5000 controller stores controller system data in structures called objects. Objects are monitored and changed using specific ladder logic and structured text instructions: GSV (Get System Value) Instruction: An instruction used to monitor specific controller system data. SSV (Set System Value) Instruction: An instruction used to set specific controller system data. Use the GSV/SSV instructions carefully. Changes to objects storing controller system data or based on controller system data can cause unintended controller operation that may injure personnel and damage equipment.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2sb56r
12--2
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
To clarify, state that the object class is the general category, the instance name is the specific occurrence, and the attribute is the specific piece of data.
GSV/SSV Parameters
Note that the source and destination are similar to the source and destination in a MOV instruction.
Instance Attribute Source (SSV) or destination (GSV)
GSV/SSV instructions operate on the values for these parameters: Class
Class Show students examples of object classes in the Online Help.
The class is the category or type of object that is accessed:
Category
Instance Note that this is one reason that naming I/O modules with a descriptive name (using purpose or location, for example) is beneficial.
If more than one project component relates to the class selected, an instance must be selected:
Specific Instance Name
Specific Component
? How would the “This” option help
Select “THIS” to identify the current task, program, or routine. The instruction can then be easily reused.
programmers work more efficiently?
Answer: The same code can be copied to another task, program, or routine and still function properly without further edit.
Attribute Note that not all attributes are able to be retrieved and set.
The attribute is the particular property or value that is retrieved or set:
Property to Monitor
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 GS2sb56r
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
12--3
Source or Destination Add that the layouts of the required source or destination data types are detailed in the documentation reference guide and in the online Help system.
A source contains values that will be set by an SSV instruction. A destination stores the values that are retrieved by a GSV instruction:
Storage Tag for Value
The destination tag data type must match the size and layout of the source as specified in the Help system.
If the tag is a user-defined data type or an array of data, select the correct member of the user-defined data type or element of the array:
User-Defined Data Type Based on Data Structure in the Help System
The first member of the tag (Year) must be selected.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2sb56r
12--4
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
Example: GSV Instruction GSV instructions can be used to retrieve information about program scan time:
Tag
User-Defined Data Type
In the example instructions, point out the CIP object class and the CIP object name and then the attribute name. Note that these instructions are not conditioned.
This example shows how to retrieve status information from a program class. The specified program is named “DISCRETE”: One GSV instruction retrieves the value of the last scan time. The other GSV instruction retrieves the value of the max scan time.
Both instructions place the data in different members of a user-defined structure named Discrete_Info.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 GS2sb56r
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
12--5
Example: SSV Instruction The following is an example of an SSV instruction:
Add that this method can also be used to enable or disable an I/O module, which is similar to inhibiting bits within a PLC-5 controller. In the example instructions, point out the object class and the object name and then the attribute name.
In this example, an SSV instruction is used to enable or disable a program. Based on the value moved into the Discrete_Progr_Flag tag, the appropriate value is placed in the disable flag attribute of the program named “DISCRETE.”
Status Flags Stress that most controller values are accessed using GSV and SSV instructions.
Controller status and arithmetic status flags can also be examined for specific data.
Note that flags are not base tags. Programmers will never see or create alias tags for them.
Most controller configuration and status values are accessed using the GSV and SSV instructions. There is also a set of status and arithmetic flags that can be accessed directly in relay instruction operands. These flags are not base tags and you cannot create alias tags for them.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2sb56r
12--6
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
Controller Status Flags Limited controller status can be examined using the following controller status flags: This status flag . . .
Is set after the . . .
First scan
S:FS
First normal scan of the routines in the current program
Minor fault
S:MINOR
Generation of an instruction-execution minor fault by program execution
Arithmetic Status Flags Add that for on-the-job reference, the status flags are listed in the documentation reference guide.
Mention that a non-recoverable fault is often called a hardware fault.
Arithmetic status flags can be used to view the results of an arithmetic operation: This status flag . . .
Is set when the . . .
Overflow
S:V
Value being stored cannot fit into the destination because it is either greater than the maximum value or less than the minimum value for the destination
Zero
S:Z
Instruction’s destination value is zero [0]
Sign
S:N
Instruction’s destination value is negative
Carry
S:C
Instruction generated a carry
Fault Types The controller detects three main categories of faults: Non-recoverable major fault Recoverable major fault
Minor fault
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 GS2sb56r
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
Mention that a non-recoverable fault is often called a hardware fault.
12--7
Non-Recoverable Major Fault Non-Recoverable Major Fault: A fault within the controller that is severe enough to shut it down.
Note that students should have a basic understanding of digital I/O configuration from the fundamentals course or equivalent experience. More in-depth information is available in the Troubleshooting Discrete I/O Modules lesson. Mention in controllers with older firmware (version 13 or earlier), a non-recoverable fault is indicated by a solid red OK LED.
The following changes take place in the system: Outputs change to the Fault Mode state set in the I/O configuration. The controller clears the project from its memory.
Depending on your controller and firmware, the controller OK LED turns flashing red or solid red. The word “Faulted” is displayed in the Online toolbar.
Flashing Red (Solid in Some Controllers)
Recoverable Major Fault Note that the major fault types and codes and the minor fault types and codes can be found in the Help system and the appendices of the Procedures Guide.
Recoverable Major Fault: A fault that is severe enough to shut down the controller if the condition is not cleared. A recoverable major fault can be of two categories: Instruction execution Other errors:
-- Power loss -- Loss of critical I/O -- Array subscript errors
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2sb56r
12--8
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
Recoverable Major Fault Processing: Level 1 When a recoverable major fault first occurs, the following changes take place in the system: A major fault bit is set in the controller.
Any user-programmed fault routines are executed: -- Program-level fault routine -- Controller-fault handler Fault Routine Tell students that the fault routine is created in the program and assigned. Additionally, a GSV instruction can be used to retrieve the fault code and store it in a tag. Remind students that non-instruction level faults include I/O faults, task watchdog faults, etc. Add that for non-instruction faults, no program fault routines are called.
? How do you access another routine
Each program can have its own fault routine: The controller executes the program’s fault routine when an instruction-related fault occurs. If a fault is cleared, the routine continues executing at the instruction immediately after the one that caused the fault:
-- The controller does not enter Fault mode. A fault routine normally contains logic to identify a fault and sometimes clear it: Fault Routine Icon
from the main routine?
Answer: Program a JSR instruction to call the specified routine (subroutine) from the main routine. Fault Routine Code
Elements 0 to 1: 64-Bit Timestamp Element 2: Fault Type (Lower 16 Bits) and Code (Upper 16 Bits) Elements 3 to 10: Fault-Dependent Information
Controller Fault Handler Each project contains a Controller Fault Handler folder. A programmer may add one optional program to it. A controller fault handler executes in the following situations: When a recoverable major fault is not related to an instruction
When a program fault routine does not exist or could not clear an instruction-related fault
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 GS2sb56r
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
Note that the programming language works in the same manner as the programming in a fault routine.
12--9
At minimum, a main routine must be created and assigned:
Program Main Routine Subroutine
Recoverable Major Fault Processing: Level 2 If the controller fault handler does not exist or cannot clear the recoverable major fault, the controller enters Fault mode and shuts down: Outputs change to the configured output state for Program mode.
The controller OK LED flashes red. The word “Faulted” is displayed in the Online toolbar:
Logix5563
Flashing Red
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2sb56r
12--10
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
Multiple Recoverable Major Faults Remind students that the fault information is displayed on the Major Faults tab of the Controller Properties dialog box.
With multitasking capabilities, a controller can handle as many as 32 simultaneous recoverable major faults. If multiple recoverable major faults are reported, the following actions take place: The controller processes the faults in the order that they occur.
If any of the faults are not cleared by the controller fault handler,
Remind students that a watchdog fault occurs if the sum of the execution times for all programs in a task is greater than the watchdog value.
the controller goes into Fault mode: -- The fault that was not cleared and up to two additional faults are logged. -- This information can be viewed via the Major Faults tab in the controller properties. If over 32 major faults occur at the same time, the controller goes into Fault mode: -- The first three major faults are logged into the controller fault log. If a watchdog fault occurs a second time in the same logic scan, the controller enters Fault mode, whether or not the controller fault handler clears the fault.
Common Major Faults Common major faults include: Required I/O connection has failed Array subscript is too big
A timer has a negative preset or accumulated value Task watchdog timer has expired Others Minor Fault Minor Fault: A fault that is not severe enough to shut down the controller: Low battery Serial port problems
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 GS2sb56r
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
12--11
With a minor fault, the following changes take place in the system: The program scan and normal I/O control continues. The controller OK LED remains solid green.
A minor fault bit is set.
Logix5563
Normal Operating State
Solid Green
A minor fault may only be detected if programming language is written to monitor it or if you monitor the Minor Faults tab in the Controller properties.
A minor fault does not affect application operation. However, clearing a minor fault may improve scan time.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2sb56r
12--12
Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
Here’s How
To perform the following tasks: Retrieve and set a controller status value using GSV and SSV instructions Assign a fault routine Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the CCP143_1756r_DEM2.acd project during the demonstration.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
Object and Attribute information found in the Help system
-
Fault Routine Assignment drop-down list
Rev. August 2012 GS2sb56r
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
12--13
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice retrieving controller status data. Context: You have completed and tested your project. You would like to test your fault routine to verify it works correctly. For troubleshooting purposes, you want to retrieve the maximum scan time for each program in the project. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the GS2_1756r_A1.acd file. 2. Download your project to the controller in slot 1. 3. Place the controller in Remote Run mode. 4. The controller has faulted because the logic in rung 3 of the Main routine of the Conveyor program is attempting to place a value in an element of an array that does not exist. Clear the fault from within the Controller Properties dialog box. 5. Assign the Conveyor_Fault routine as the fault routine of the Conveyor program. 6. Place the controller in Remote Run mode and verify the fault has been corrected. 7. What instruction could be used to retrieve the maximum scan time of a program?
8. In the MainRoutine of the Conveyor program, create the ladder logic required to retrieve the maximum scan time for the Conveyor program. Store this information in an existing program tag named Max_Scan_Time.
Tip "
Rev. August 2012
Search Help for the MAXSCANTIME attribute for help configuring your logic.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2e56r
12--14
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
9. Modify your ladder logic so that the rung could be copied to any program and still retrieve the max scan time without additional modification. 10. Copy the Max_Scan_Time tag and the ladder logic into the main routines of the other three programs. 11. Verify and save your project. 12. To test your work, verify that a scan time is recorded in each of the four ladder logic instructions.
How Did You Do?
Turn to the Answers section.
Exercise B
In this exercise, you will practice retrieving controller status data and store this information in a user-defined data type. Context: Using the project in the controller in slot 3, you want to record shift numbers based on controller status data. You are now ready to retrieve the current controller wall clock value. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the GS2_1756r_B1.acd file. 2. Based on the WallClockTime Date/Time information in the Help system, create a user-defined data type called DateTime that will store the current wall clock time. 3. Create a tag called Wall_Clock that uses the DateTime data type that you just created. 4. Open the MainRoutine of the Shift_Calculation program in the Periodic Task. 5. Draft the ladder diagram required to retrieve the current clock time from the controller and store it in the Wall_Clock tag.
Tip "
Be sure to select the correct member in the Wall_Clock tag. 6. In the Shift_Calculation program tags, create a new DINT tag called Shift_Number.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 GS2e56r
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
Tip "
12--15
Shift times are calculated using the following parameters. 24-hour times are used: If the time is Between (Limited to). . .
The Shift Number Is . . .
7
14:59
1
15
22:59
2
23
6:59
3
7. In the Shift_Calculation MainRoutine, enter the logic required to move the correct shift number into the Shift_Number tag based on the current Wall_Clock.Hour time. 8. Save your project. 9. Download your project to the controller in slot 3. 10. Place the controller in the Remote Run mode. 11. Verify that the current shift is correctly calculated in the ladder logic. 12. Monitor the Wall_Clock tag to see the values changing for all members of the structure.
How Did You Do?
Turn to the Answers section.
Exercise C
In this exercise, you will practice retrieving controller status data and assigning a fault routine. Context: You must program a fault routine that will capture a controller’s major fault record and clear the fault record. You must develop logic that faults the controller to test the fault routine. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the GS2_1756r_C1.acd file. 2. Create a user-defined data type named MajorFaultRecord with the following elements: Name
Rev. August 2012
Data Type
TimeLow
DINT
TimeHigh
DINT
Type
INT
Code
INT
Info
DINT[8] E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2e56r
12--16
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
3. Create two new controller-scoped tags using the MajorFaultRecord data type: Capture Clear 4. In the Controller Fault Handler folder within the Controller Organizer create a new program name ProgramFaults. 5. Create a new routine within ProgramFaults named Capture_Clear_Faults. 6. Assign Capture_Clear_Faults as the main routine of the ProgramFaults program. 7. Open the Capture_Clear_Faults routine. 8. Add a GSV instruction that will store the MajorFaultRecord of any program that calls this fault handler routine in the Capture.TimeLow tag. 9. Add a SSV instruction that will use the Clear.TimeLow tag to clear the MajorFaultRecord of any program that calls this fault handler routine. 10. Configure the existing Clear_Fault tag as an enabling condition for the SSV instruction. 11. Open the MainRoutine in the MainProgram of the MainTask. 12. Add the following logic to the MainRoutine:
Tip "
This logic will generate a controller fault by placing an invalid value into the Timer tag preset when selector switch 12 is enabled. 13. Verify your project. 14. Download to the controller in slot 1 and place your controller in Remote Run.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 GS2e56r
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
12--17
15. Verify the project is working correctly by performing the following: A. Enable selector switch DI12. B. Verify the controller faults. C. Monitor the Capture tag and confirm it is populated with data from the MajorFaultRecord. D. Access Controller Properties and clear the fault. E. Enable selector switch DI13. F. Place the controller in Remote Run mode. G. Confirm the controller does not enter a faulted state. H. Go offline and close your project.
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2e56r
12--18
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
Answers
Exercise A 4. The fault can be cleared by selecting the Clear Majors button from within the Controller Properties dialog box:
5. Assign the Conveyor_Fault routine from the Configuration tab within the Program Properties dialog box:
7. The Get System Value (GSV) instruction retrieves controller system data including the maximum scan time for a program.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 GS2e56r
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
12--19
8. Based on the memory structure of the MaxScanTime attribute, a program-scoped DINT tag was created in the Conveyor program and the following ladder logic was programmed:
9. Because the “THIS” instance name was used, the ladder logic could easily be copied to the three machine stations.
Exercise B 2. The following user-defined data type was created to store the date/time information in a readable form:
Help System Information:
The data type must be the same order as the date/time information or data will be stored incorrectly.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2e56r
12--20
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
3. A tag named Wall_Clock (of the DateTime data type) was created to store the retrieved wall clock values:
5. The following ladder logic was entered to retrieve the date/time information and set the shift number:
This is a tag of a user-defined data type named DateTime.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
The first element of the address (Year) must be selected.
Rev. August 2012 GS2e56r
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
12--21
7. The following logic could be used to move the correct shift number into the Shift_Number tag based on the current Wall_Clock.Hour time:
Time Between 7 and 14:59
Time Between 15 and 22:59
Time Between 23 and 6:59
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2e56r
12--22
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
Exercise C 2. The structure of your MajorFaultRecord data type should be configured similar to the following:
3. You should have added the following controller-scoped tags:
6. Your Controller Fault Handler folder should now look similar to the following:
8. Your GSV instruction should be configured similar to the following:
Use the first member of the Capture tag
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 GS2e56r
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
12--23
9. Your SSV instruction should be configured similar to the following:
10. The rung you placed the SSV instruction on should now look similar to the following:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. GS2e56r
12--24
Exercise: Retrieving and Setting Logix5000 Controller Status Values with GSV/SSV Instructions
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 GS2e56r
Lesson
13
Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to program a Bit Field Distribute (BTD) instruction in an RSLogix 5000 project.
When You Will Do This Sometimes groups of bits within a value have a specific meaning. A BTD instruction lets you extract those bits so they are easier to use.
Before You Begin Mention that if the length of the bit field extends beyond the destination (Dest), the instruction does not save the extra bits. Any extra bits do not wrap to the next word but instead are dropped.
BTD (Bit Field Distribute) Instruction A BTD instruction copies specified bits from the Source, shifts the bits to the appropriate position, and writes the bits into the destination (Dest). When enabled, a BTD instruction copies a group of bits in the following manner: The group of bits is identified by the Source value bit (lowest bit number of the group) and the length (number of bits to copy).
The destination (Dest) bit identifies the lowest bit number to start with in the destination (Dest). The Source value remains unchanged.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. BTDsb56r
13--2
Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project
The following example copies 6 bits to a different location in the same tag:
Destination (Dest) Bit
Source Bit
value_1 Before BTD Instruction value_1 After BTD Instruction
The shaded boxes show the bits that changed in value_1.
AFTER MOVE:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 BTDsb56r
Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Here’s How
To program a BTD instruction.
Example
BTD Instruction
13--3
This example gets status information about an I/O module and uses a BTD instruction to make the information easier to use: 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
To show why you are using bits 12 to 15: 1. Click the GSV instruction. 2. Press F1. 3. Scroll through the help and click the GSV/SSV Objects link. It is near the end of the Description section.
1. The GSV instruction gets status information about some part of the system. 2. In this example, the GSV instruction gets the status of the I/O module in slot 2 of the workstation. 3. Bits 12 to 15 give the status of the module.
4. Click the MODULE link.
4. The BTD instruction extracts bits 12 to 15 and stores them in a separate tag.
Remove the I/O module from the chassis and point out the change in the status value.
5. It is now a lot easier to use the status information. If the value is not 4, there is a problem.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. BTDsb56r
13--4
Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the BTD_1756R_DEM1.acd file for your demonstration. After you demonstrate, ask each key point as a question and have the students tell you what they noticed.
Your Turn
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Which side of the bit pattern is the first bit
-
At what number the source or destination bit starts
Now it’s your turn. Complete Exercise A.
Rev. August 2012 BTDsb56r
Exercise: Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project
13--5
Exercise: Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project Exercise A
Practice programming a Bit Field Distribute (BTD) instruction. Context: Suppose you need to know the physical position of the controller’s keyswitch. You already have a GSV instruction that gets the status attribute for the controller. You want to make it easier to read the position of the keyswitch. Status Attribute for the Controller The status attribute for the controller provides the following information. You want only the keyswitch position. Bits Bits 3--0 Bits 7--4
Bits 11--8
Bits 13--12
Bits 15--14
Bit Pattern
Meaning Reserved
0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 0001 0010 0100 1000 01 10 11 01 10
reserved flash update in progress reserved reserved flash is bad faulted run program recoverable minor fault unrecoverable minor fault recoverable major fault unrecoverable major fault keyswitch in run keyswitch in program keyswitch in remote controller is changing modes debug mode if controller is in Run mode
When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. BTDe56r
13--6
Exercise: Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Directions: 1. Open the BTD_1756R_A1.acd project file. 2. Open MainRoutine.
The MainRoutine has a GSV instruction that retrieves the Status attribute of the controller. The instruction stores the value in the Controller_Status tag. 3. Extract the bits for the keyswitch position from the Controller_Status tag and put them in their own tag. The Controller_Status tag is an INT data type so create an INT tag to store the keyswitch bits. 4. Download the project to slot 1 of your workstation. 5. Put the controller in Run mode. 6. Change the position of the keyswitch and check your work: If you turn the keyswitch to . . .
The status value should be . . .
RUN
1
REM
3
7. Save the project. 8. Go offline.
How Did You Do?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Turn to the Answers section.
Rev. August 2012 BTDe56r
Exercise: Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Rev. August 2012
13--7
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. BTDe56r
13--8
Exercise: Programming a BTD Instruction in an RSLogix 5000 Project
Answers
Exercise A 3. The following graphic shows how to set up the BTD instruction:
Rung 0
The GSV instruction that retrieves the Status attribute of the controller and stores it in the Controller_Status tag.
Rung 1
The BTD instruction copies bits 12 and 13 (length = 2) of the Controller_Status tag. It puts them in bits 0 and 1 of the Keyswitch_Position tag.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 BTDe56r
Lesson
14
Configuring a Logix5000 Message What You Will Learn Remind students how this is different than the data they sent earlier across a ControlNet network. Stress the difference between produced and consumed tags (scheduled with RPI) and messages (unscheduled). Poll students to find out if they have programmed messages for any other types of controllers.
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Configure a message (read, write, and CIP generic) Create and enter a numeric communications path
When You Will Do This Here are some situations when you may need to use a Message (MSG) instruction: Send data to other Logix5000 controllers
Send data to PLC-5 and SLC 500 processors Reset faulted 1756-I/O modules
Before You Begin
Remind students that deterministic data is data that arrives at the same time interval. Stress that scheduled data, such as control and I/O data, is given highest priority on the ControlNet network. Other information, such as programming or upload and download operations, does not interfere with the transport of control and I/O data.
? How is scheduled data sent?
Unscheduled Data Unscheduled Data: Non-deterministic information that is not time critical. This type of data has the following characteristics: Transmits after all scheduled data has been sent Can be any of the following:
-- Connection establishment -- Programming data (uploads and downloads) -- Ladder-initiated, peer-to-peer messaging data (MSG instruction)
Answer: Using produced and consumed tags (locally and over a Control network).
Messages to Logix5000 Controllers
Note that PLC-5 and SLC 500 controllers require Integer data.
A message is unscheduled data that is exchanged over a communications network. When using a message to send data to or from a Logix5000 controller, keep in mind the following rules: Both the source and destination tags must be controller-scoped. The source and destination tags cannot be Axis, Message, or Motion_Group tags.
Array elements and structure members cannot be specified: -- Use an alias tag to send these types of data. A portion of an array cannot be transferred: -- Send the entire array using the array name, or send one element of an array using an alias tag.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. MS2sb56r
14--2
Configuring a Logix5000 Message
Messages to Other Controllers A Logix5000 controller can also send a message to communicate with the following controllers: A PLC-5 controller
An SLC 500 controller A PLC-3 controller A PLC-2 controller Configuring a Message To configure a message to any controller or module, the following items must be completed in this order: 1. Add the destination controller to the I/O configuration (optional).
Remind students that in other controllers, the data file is already created. In this controller, you must define the memory area with a tag.
2. Create a controller-scoped tag of the message data type. 3. Along with any ladder logic conditions, program a message (MSG) instruction with the new tag as the message control tag. 4. Configure the MSG instruction. In the graphic, point out that the Message tag is the main operand in the MSG instruction.
The flow of the configuration process is shown in the following graphic:
1. Add the Destination Controller
2. Create a Tag of the Message Data Type
3. Program an MSG Instruction 4. Configure the MSG Instruction
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 MS2sb56r
Configuring a Logix5000 Message
Mention that complete demonstration including how to select the values used in the dialog box will be presented in the Here’s How demonstration.
14--3
To continuously enable a message, condition the message with an XIO instruction that examines the message control word enable bit:
Note that the message is continuous as long as the task is active and the routine is enabled. Add that when using a message for fault finding, use a pushbutton to enable the rung. This will allow the entire message code to be displayed.
Read, Write, and Block Transfer Parameters The following is an example of a configuration screen for a read message:
Note that RSLogix 5000, version 10 and higher, provides many enhancements for sharing data with SLC 500 controllers.
To configure a read, write, or block transfer message, the following parameters must be configured: Source Element: The tag or logical address currently containing the data to be transferred:
Note that a read instruction helps identify the source of the data. Writes do not identify the destination.
-- For a read message type, the source element is the address of
Example: The tag timer1 is one element that consists of one timer structure.
the data you want to read in the target device. Use the addressing syntax of the target device. -- For a write message type, the source tag is the tag of the data in the Logix5000 controller that you want to send to the target device. Number of Elements: The number of elements to be transferred. The number of elements you read/write depends on the type of data you are using. Destination Element: The tag or logical address to which the data will be transferred:
-- For a read message type, the destination tag is the tag in the Logix5000 controller where the data being read from the target device will be stored. -- For a write message type, the destination element is the address in the other device (remote device) where the data will be written. Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. MS2sb56r
14--4
Configuring a Logix5000 Message
Cache Connections: A bit that instructs the controller to
Note that entering a numeric path is included in the Procedures Guide. A detailed example is also included.
maintain or close the connection after a message has executed: -- Because initiating a message increases scan time, for a continuous message, enable the cache bit. -- For a message that is infrequently sent, disable the cache bit. Path: -- Select a module or port in the I/O configuration using the Browse feature. -- If the module is not available in the network tree, create and enter a numeric path.
Creating and Entering a Numeric Communications Path Review the path rules in the Procedures Guide.
Tip " Point out the following in the address: S
1 represents the path out the backplane of the controller.
S
ENET_Module is the name of the selected module.
S
2 represents the Ethernet port.
S
The IP address is the IP address of Tip " the destination module.
S
1 represents the path from the destination module to the controller across the backplane.
S
3 represents the slot number of the destination controller.
Note that a CIP message can send configuration information to a module that can be conditioned by an operator input.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
The numeric path rules are provided in the Glossary of the Procedures Guide. Turn to the Glossary and review the rules now. A combination of module name and numeric paths can be used:
1, ENET_Module, 2, 130.151.138.104, 1, 3 Numeric Communications Path Module Name
Programmatic reconfiguration of the communications path, node address, parameters, and source/destination permits one message to target multiple devices, reducing the number of messages in a project.
CIP Generic Message Parameters A CIP generic message is used to: Transfer a block of data between Logix5000 controllers Send configuration data from a Logix5000 controller to an I/O module: -- Perform a pulse test on a digital output module -- Reset electronic fuses on a digital output module -- Reset latched diagnostics on a digital input or output module -- Reset latched status on an analog module Perform a device reset or Device Who operation Perform custom operations
Rev. August 2012 MS2sb56r
Configuring a Logix5000 Message
Note that a hex code for the Service type is not always required as of RSLogix 5000 software, version 10.
14--5
The following is an example of a configuration screen for a CIP generic message:
To configure a CIP generic message, the following parameters must be defined: Service Type: The type of service to be performed on the module (e.g., resetting latched diagnostics or performing a pulse test). Depending on the service, some of the following Hex codes may be required: Note that these names were changed to match the Class, Instance, and Attribute Names of DeviceNet objects (for DeviceNet explicit messaging). Mention that logical address refers to an address in a controller other than a Logix5000 controller. Point out that with RSLogix 5000 software, version 10 or higher, programmatic bumpless reconfiguration of an I/O module allows you to reconfigure I/O module settings without resetting the outputs, providing better control of I/O.
Tip "
-----
Service code: Category of service to be performed. Class: The I/O module type. Instance: Message type ID. Attribute: The attribute to be reset (such as latched status on an analog module). Source Element: The tag or logical address currently containing the data to be transferred. Source Length: The number of elements to be transferred.
Destination: The tag or logical address to which the data will be transferred.
Additional information on Service Type can be found in the Procedures Guide.
Message Execution Have the students open the Documentation Reference Guide. Review the MSG bits and their functions. Point out the information on MSG error codes. Note that the enhanced message debug tools also provide error codes that reduce ambiguity in error messages.
Rev. August 2012
While online, message errors can be identified in RSLogixt 5000 software: A message that is not received will not have the .DN bit set. Error codes can be found in the configuration dialog box:
-- Enhanced message debug tools identify which module generated the run-time error code.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. MS2sb56r
14--6
Configuring a Logix5000 Message
Here’s How
To perform the following tasks: Configure a message (read, write, and CIP generic) Create and enter a numeric communications path Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the CCP143_1756r_DEM2.acd project during the demonstration.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
How to open the Message Configuration dialog box
-
Cache Connections option
Rev. August 2012 MS2sb56r
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Message
14--7
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Message Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice configuring a message that is sent from one Logix5000 controller to another Logix5000 controller. Context: You are part of a team that programmed a Logix5000 compressor assembly line. This line is running successfully; therefore, you have set up an identical production line. These lines are connected by a network. To keep track of daily production, you want the master controller to read the production total from the other line. You are now ready to send a message from a Logix5000 controller to another Logix5000 controller. The plant setup is shown in the following graphic: Remote Line
Network Local Line
When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the MS2_1756r_A2.acd file. 2. Download the project to the controller in slot 3 of the remote workstation. 3. Place the controller in Remote Run mode. 4. Open the MS2_1756r_A1.acd file.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. MS2e56r
14--8
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Message
5. To select the controller in the communication path in the message configuration, add the controller in slot 3 of the remote workstation to the I/O configuration of the project: Add a local communications module (the CNB or ENBT) to the I/O Configuration Add the remote communications module Add the remote controller in slot 3, name it Remote_Controller. 6. In the Conveyor program, create a ladder diagram routine named Count_Total. 7. In the Conveyor program Main Routine, program a JSR instruction to access the Count_Total routine. 8. At what scope must a message control tag be created?
9. Create a message control tag for the message execution called Count_Message. 10. In the Count_Total routine, write ladder logic that enables a message instruction when DI7 is pressed.
Tip "
Create a tag named Read_Remote_Total and make it an alias for DI7. 11. Configure the message instruction as follows: The message uses the Count_Message message control tag. The message type is CIP Data Table Read.
When DI7 is pressed, the message reads the value of
Count_Passed.ACC from the controller in slot 3 of the remote station.
Tip "
The timer value (Count_Passed.ACC) is a DINT.
The message stores the value in a new tag called Count_Passed_Line_2.
Tip "
Be sure that you have created the Count_Passed_Line_2 tag in your application. 12. Identify the communication path in the communications configuration of the MSG instruction. 13. Save the project. 14. Download the project to the controller in slot 1. 15. Change the controller operating mode to Remote Run.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 MS2e56r
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Message
14--9
16. Test your system by performing the following actions and placing a check in each completed box: Press DI7. Monitor the Count_Passed_Line_2 tag. Record the value: _____________________ At the other production line (workstation) create one or more new parts. To create a new part, toggle DI12 from the left then to the right.
-
Tip "
-
Press DI7 on the remote workstation and verify that the value of the Count_Passed_Line_2 tag increases. Using the other production line, create 1 more new part. Press DI7 again and verify that the value of the Count_Passed_Line_2 tag increases again.
How Did You Do?
Turn to the Answers section.
Exercise B
In this exercise, you will practice configuring a CIP Generic message. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Context: During operation, you want the controller to monitor the part sensor input for an open-wire condition. If an open-wire condition exists, you want the controller to turn on an alarm light. When the condition is cleared, you want the operator to unlatch the module fault bits using a reset pushbutton. Directions: 1. Open the MS2_1756r_B1.acd file. 2. Verify the project and correct any errors. 3. Create a control tag for the message execution called Part_Sensor_Reset_Message.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. MS2e56r
14--10
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Message
4. In the I/O Diagnostics routine in the Common program, enter the following ladder logic (the tags have already been created):
5. Make the Part_Sensor_Fault tag an alias tag for an open wire fault on the part sensor (bit 12 of the input card in slot 2). 6. Read the ladder logic to gain an understanding of its purpose. A. If the Part Sensor device has an open-wire fault, a pilot light is illuminated. B. If the operator pushes the reset button, a message is sent to reset the module and turn off the light. 7. Create a controller-scoped tag named Part_Fault_Source of DINT data type. 8. Modify the value of Part_Fault_Source tag so that each bit within the tag has a value of 1.
Tip "
Entering a value of - 1 in the Part_Fault_Source tag will set each bit to a value of 1. 9. Configure the message to reset the input module in slot 2. Message Type: CIP Generic Service Type: Reset Latched Diagnostics (O) Source Element: Part_Fault_Source Communications Path: Input module in slot 2
Tip "
For help, go to the Reset Latched Diagnostics on a Digital Module procedure within online Help. 10. Download the project to the controller in slot 3 and then place the controller in the Remote Run mode. 11. To test the application, perform the following actions: A. To simulate the open-wire fault for the part sensor, unlock the module wiring arm on the input module in slot two and then remove the wiring arm. B. Verify that the operator alarm (DO7) is on.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 MS2e56r
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Message
14--11
C. Verify that the diagnostic fault lights for the module are on and that the fault tags each contain a 1. D. Replace the wiring arm. E. Acknowledge the alarm and reset the module by pressing pushbutton DI6. F. Verify that the module LEDs and the alarm light are reset. G. Go offline.
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. MS2e56r
14--12
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Message
Answers
Exercise A 5. The I/O configuration for an EtherNet/IP network should appear as follows:
Local Comm Module
Remote Comm Module Message Source
7. Your JSR instruction should be configured similar to the following example:
8. The message execution tag must be controller-scoped. 10. The ladder logic that initiates the messages should appear as follows:
New Tag of the MESSAGE Data Type
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 MS2e56r
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Message
14--13
11. The Configuration tab should appear as follows:
Count_Passed_Line_2 is a new tag that must be created.
The Communication tab should appear as follows:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. MS2e56r
14--14
Exercise: Configuring a Logix5000 Message
Exercise B If your project is not functioning correctly, verify that you have completed the following actions: - Created a controller-scoped tag of the message type for the message instruction - Made the Part_Sensor_Fault tag an alias tag for Local:2:I.OpenWire.12 - Created a source tag (DINT) with each reset value bit set to 1 - Created the ladder logic in the routine and configured the MSG instruction - Selected the input module in the Communications tab The following alias tags and configurations were completed: Alias for an Open-Wire Fault on the Part Sensor
Input Module Selected on the Communications Tab
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Controller-Scoped Message Control Tag
Rev. August 2012 MS2e56r
Lesson
15
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram What You Will Learn Mention that you can also protect an add-on instruction so that people can’t change its logic and local data. Or you can hide the logic and local data completely. Protecting an add-on instruction is outside the scope of this lesson.
Tip "
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Plan the parameters of an add-on instruction Decide if you need an EnableInFalse routine
Create an add-on instruction Use an add-on instruction in a routine Monitor the values and logic of an add-on instruction Export and import an add-on instruction
Use RSLogix 5000 software to learn more. Go to Help > Learning Center > What’s New.
When You Will Do This Explain that add-on instructions are similar to subroutines. Point out the advantages and tradeoffs of add-on instructions as you go along.
Use add-on instructions to save development time by making your code more modular, re-usable, and easy to use: Encapsulate your most commonly used logic as instructions, similar to the controller’s built-in instructions
Re-use the instructions in any of your projects Monitor an instruction and see its logic as it executes, even when you use the instruction multiple times in a project
Before You Begin
Add-On Instructions Add-On Instruction: An instruction that you build from the built-in instructions in the controller. An add-on instruction: Is similar to a subroutine
Lets you encapsulate a routine of logic and use it as an instruction
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILsb56r
15--2
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Explain that an add-on instruction executes similar to a subroutine. You give it inputs, execute some code, and get outputs.
Example of an Add-On Instruction This add-on instruction checks for jammed product at the entry gate of a conveyor:
The instruction reads the state of a photoeye at the entrance of a conveyor.
If the photoeye is on too long, it means that product is jammed. When that happens, the instruction turns on the Jammed bit.
When you execute the add-on instruction, it executes its logic:
The Detect_Jam instruction executes this logic.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILsb56r
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
15--3
An Add-On Instruction Uses a Definition Point out that with a subroutine you need a copy of it in each program that uses the subroutine.
Add-on instructions are global in nature. You first create a definition for the instruction. Then you enter instances of it into any of your programs:
This is the definition for the instruction. It’s the template for each instance.
Rev. August 2012
These are instances of the instruction.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILsb56r
15--4
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Key Parts of the Definition of an Add-On Instruction The definition of an add-on instruction contains parameters, local tags, and logic: Parameters and local tags are the data that the instruction uses.
Logic is the code that the instruction uses. It’s comprised of one routine.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILsb56r
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
15--5
Parameters When you create an add-on instruction, you set up parameters for the instruction:
Parameter: A value or values that you give to an add-on instruction or get back from it. Parameters create the interface to the code of the instruction. Here are some examples: Configuration values such as set points and timer presets
Commands such as start, stop, and reset Input values from devices Output values for devices Status and health values such as done or faulted
Parameters reduce programming time and complexity. Local Tags When you create an add-on instruction, you can also set up local tags:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILsb56r
15--6
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Compare this to a subroutine. A subroutine may show you more data than you really need to see. This makes it more difficult to monitor and troubleshoot.
Local Tag: An intermediate or storage value that an add-on instruction uses as it executes. It is a value that you don’t need to see or use outside of the instruction. Here are some examples of local tags: Timers and counters Storage arrays
Bits that store the sum of several input conditions Results of intermediate calculations You can Alias a Local tag (or one of its members) to an input or output parameter. In this way, the local tag can be easily monitored/ modified outside of the AOI. Routine “Type” Control Editable in AOI Definition You can change the programming language of the Logic routine after you develop the instruction. Keep in mind that changing the language deletes the existing routine and replaces it with an empty routine in the new language. This is helpful if you want to develop several AOIs with similar interfaces but different languages for the logic. You can change the language type through the General tab of the AOI:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILsb56r
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
15--7
Changes to the Definition If you change the definition, it ripples through all the instances of the instruction in your project:
Suppose you add a parameter to the definition.
It ripples through each instance of the instruction.
In version 17 and earlier, if you change a default value for a parameter or local tag, it doesn’t change existing instances of the instruction. They keep their current values. Starting with version 18, you can choose to send changes you make to default values of a definition to all its instances in the project.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILsb56r
15--8
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Mention that default value changes can also be done in: S
Context menu (Controller Organizer only)
S
Data Monitor
S
Logic Editor
S
Watch Pane
Change the default values within the Local Tags tab:
Add-On Instruction Design Considerations
? What happens to logic in a
When a rung of ladder logic contains an add-on instruction, the following actions occur during each scan: Data for each input parameter is passed to the instruction. If the rung-in condition is true, the instruction’s Logic routine is executed. If the rung-in condition is false, the instruction’s Logic routine is skipped.
Tip "
subroutine if the JSR rung is False? Answer: Logic is not scanned and values in the subroutine remain unchanged.
Version 18 improves the false scan times of AOIs that aren’t using an EnableInFalse routine. See Knowledgebase ID #53903 for ways to improve the false scan time if you need to use an EnableInFalse routine.
Tell students the same thing would happen if an AOI’s rung-in condition is False. So if actions need to occur (like resetting a timer or counter, unlatching a bit,) when the rung goes False you could add an EnableInFalse routine.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILsb56r
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Here’s How Keep the visuals open.
Example Relate this to a real system. It could have many gates, all of which use the same logic to detect a jam.
15--9
To plan the parameters of an add-on instruction: Activity: As your instructor demonstrates this procedure, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Planning the Parameters of an Add-On Instruction Suppose you want an instruction that checks for jammed product and looks like this:
Here are the parameters and local tags for the instruction: Value
Use?
Required?
Visible?
n Input parameter
D. State of the photoeye that detects the product
E. How long to let the photoeye stay on before the instruction flags a jam. You want to be able to configure this value.
F. Flag that there is a jam. You want to see this and use it in your application code.
G. Timer that times how long the photoeye is on. You really don’t care about the accumulated value.
Your Turn
Output parameter
Local tag
n
n
n
n Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
n Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
n Local tag
Now it’s your turn. Do Exercise A and return here when you’re done.
Tell the students to stay at their desk and do the exercise. They don’t need the workstation for it. Review the answers when they’re done. Then continue with the lesson.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILsb56r
15--10
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Before You Begin
After you plan the parameters for an add-on instruction, you have to make these decisions about its logic: Language for the Logic routine Organization of the Logic routine
Optional scan mode routines Language for the Logic Routine of the Instruction You can program the Logic routine of an add-on instruction in any of these languages: Ladder diagram Function block diagram
Structured text You can use the instruction in any language, regardless of which language you use for the Logic routine.
Organization of the Logic Routine If the students ask, tell them that there’s no defined limit to the levels of nested instructions. It seems to be around 62 instructions deep. They’ll get a major fault, stack overflow, if they go too deep.
You can’t call subroutines within an add-on instruction. You can organize the logic of an add-on instruction in two ways: Put all the logic in one routine Nest smaller add-on instructions within a larger add-on instruction Here’s an example of nested instructions:
Main Instruction That Controls a Conveyor
Sub-Activities, Such as Starting the Motor and Watching for Jams
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILsb56r
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
15--11
Optional Scan Mode Routines The controller executes the Logic routine of an add-on instruction like this: When this happens . . .
1.
Controller goes to Run mode.
2.
EnableIn parameter of the add-on instruction is true
3.
EnableIn parameter of the add-on instruction is false
4.
The last scan of a step of an SFC that’s configured for automatic reset
The controller . . .
Notes
Prescans the Logic routine
As a general rule, prescan executes instructions as if all conditions are false. Some instructions don’t follow the general rule. See the documentation for the instruction.
Executes the Logic routine
EnableIn is true in these situations: Ladder diagram — when the rung conditions are true. Function block diagram — True by default. Structured text — Always true.
Doesn’t execute or stops executing the Logic routine
EnableIn is false in these situations: Ladder diagram — when the rung conditions are false. Function block diagram — when you write a zero to the EnableIn parameter. Structured text — Never. EnableIn is always true.
Postscans the Logic routine
As a general rule, postscan executes instructions as if all conditions are false. Some instructions don’t follow the general rule. See the documentation for the instruction.
You can add routines to an add-on instruction that take additional actions during various scan situations:
The add-on instruction’s Prescan routine executes one time after the main program prescan. It executes according to its logic conditions. The Postscan routine executes one time after the main program postscan. It executes according to its logic conditions. The EnableInFalse routine executes when conditions are false.
? What happens to logic in a
subroutine if the JSR rung is False? Answer: Logic is not scanned and values in the subroutine remain unchanged. Tell students the same thing would happen if an AOI’s rung--in condition is False. So if actions need to occur (like resetting a timer or counter, unlatching a bit,) when the rung goes False you could add an EnableInFalse routine.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILsb56r
15--12
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Here’s How Keep the visuals open. Present the decision. Then apply it to the example.
To decide if you need an EnableInFalse routine: Ask this question: Do you need to clear datyes a or do other reset actions when rung conditions are false? Yes — Use an EnableInFalse routine.
No — You don’t need an EnableInFalse routine.
Example
Deciding If You Need an EnableInFalse Routine Suppose your add-on instruction uses a non-retentive timer, like this:
And suppose you want to reset the timer when Conveyor_Running is off. In that case, use an EnableInFalse routine to reset the timer.
Your Turn
Now it’s your turn. Do Exercise B and return here when you’re done.
Tell the students to stay at their desk and do the exercise. They don’t need the workstation for it. Review the answers when they’re done. Then continue with the lesson.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILsb56r
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Before You Begin
15--13
Once you have your general design, it’s time to create and test the definition. To do that, you’ll need to be familiar with: Accessing parameters via logic Editing the instruction
Exporting and importing Accessing Parameters via Logic When you define the parameters, RSLogix 5000 software puts them into an add-on-defined data type. Use that data type as the first tag (main operand) in each instruction:
Point out that this is similar to accessing the data of a timer or counter.
To access a parameter via logic, use this address format: Add-On-Defined_Tag.Parameter For example, use this address to read the value of the jammed bit:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILsb56r
15--14
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Editing an Add-On Instruction Point out that this is one advantage of subroutines over add-on instructions. You can edit a subroutine online.
If you need to change the logic of an add-on instruction, you must go offline and edit the definition. You can’t: Edit the logic of an add-on instruction while online
Edit just a single instance of the instruction Exporting and Importing an Add-On Instruction Compare this to a subroutine. You can export a subroutine only if you wrote it in ladder diagram.
You can export an add-on instruction to an .l5x file or import an instruction into a project via an .l5x file:
Export Import
When you import an add-on instruction, it changes any existing instances of the instruction in your project. Before you import an instruction, identify the changes. After you import the instruction, check that each instance of the instruction executes correctly.
Tip "
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Beginning with version 17 of RSLogix 5000, you can import a new add-on instruction while online to a running controller.
Rev. August 2012 AOILsb56r
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
15--15
Online Safety Warning When performing any tasks online, keep the following warning in mind: Describe any real-world situations that you are aware of in which online editing caused extensive damage in a plant.
? Define offline and online? Answer: Offline means that the workstation (computer) is displaying a copy of the project stored in the computer memory only. Online means that the workstation (computer) is displaying and changing copy of the project stored in the controller memory.
Use extreme caution when entering or editing ladder logic or data, forcing values, or making other changes online that will affect the control of devices. Mistakes can cause unintended machine motion or loss of process control, possibly injuring personnel and damaging equipment. Before performing procedures online, complete these safety precautions:
Determine if changes must be made online. Verify that your company permits online entering and editing.
Also note that the left and right power rails are illuminated in the Run and Remote Run modes to indicate that the ladder logic is active in the controller. Add that the Online graphic is animated in any online mode.
Rev. August 2012
Assess how machinery will respond to changes. Check proposed changes for accuracy. Notify all personnel of the changes. Verify that you are online to the correct controller.
Because changes in any online mode can affect machine and process control, before importing add-on instructions, verify the current communications mode using the Online toolbar.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILsb56r
15--16
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Referenced Add--On Instructions and User-Defined Data Types
You have to decide how to handle Referenced Add- On Instructions and User- Defined Data Types.
Example: When Not To Include Referenced Add-On Instructions and User-Defined Data Types Suppose you have three add-on instructions that nest a fourth add-on instruction inside them. And suppose you want to change the nested add-on instruction. You’ll only have to change it once if you don’t include it in the export file. Otherwise, you have to change it in each instruction that uses it.
Here’s How IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use AOIL_1756R_DEM1.acd for the rest of the demonstration.
To create an add-on instruction: Activity: As your instructor demonstrates this procedure, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Tip "
You’ve already done the first part of this procedure when you planned the parameters for the instruction.
The project already has the workstation tags that you need.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILsb56r
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Example
15--17
Creating an Add-On Instruction This example builds an add-on instruction that checks for jammed product at the entry gate of a conveyor: The instruction turns on its Jammed bit if the photoeye at the gate is on for too long. You’ll be able to set how long to wait before signaling a jam. Enter the General Properties
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILsb56r
15--18
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
You can copy this logic from the Detect_Jam_Routine in the Unscheduled Programs folder.
Enter the Definition Logic
When you’re done, click the Help tab of the definition and show the finished instruction.
Create the Parameters and Local Tags
Input Parameter DINT Not Required Input Parameter BOOL Required
Not Visible Local Tag
Output Parameter BOOL Not Required Visible
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILsb56r
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Example
15--19
Looking for Previously Developed Add-On Instructions You can look for previously developed Add-On Instructions that may fit your applications within the Rockwell website.
If you have time, show the Video “Faceplate/Add--On Instruction Sets” to the class.
Search the Sample Code Library (samplecode.rockwellautomation.com)
Fill in the following: Product Family Product
Technologies
Example of Search Result
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILsb56r
15--20
Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Here’s How Add the example below to the project. Then use the maintained switched on the workstation to simulate a jam. Make sure to show the instruction’s logic as it executes.
To perform the following tasks: Use an add-on instruction in a routine Monitor the values of an add-on instruction
Monitor the logic of an add-on instruction Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Example Point out that you’re seeing the data for this instance. This would be more difficult if this were a subroutine with multiple calls to it. The data may be constantly changing to reflect each call.
Using the Detect_Jam Instruction In this example, the Detect_Jam instruction continually checks for jammed product at Gate_DI12. If PE_DI12 = on for > 10 s, then Gate_DI12.Jammed = on. If Gate_DI12.Jammed = on, then light DO2 = on.
Here’s How IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids.
To perform the following tasks: Export an add-on instruction
Import an add-on instruction Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Use the steps below to help guide you during the demonstration: 1. Export the instruction. 2. Create a new project. 3. Import the instruction into the project. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILsb56r
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
15--21
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice planning the parameters for an add-on instruction that starts and stops a motor. Context: You want an instruction that starts and stops a single-speed motor like a seal-in start/stop circuit. You want it to look like this:
Pushbutton that stops the motor Pushbutton that starts the motor Contact for the motor
Fault bit for the motor
You also want the option to do the following actions based on the application: Jog the motor Set a fault if the auxiliary contact of the motor doesn’t open or close within a specified time Directions: For each of the values in the following table, check whether you’ll use it as an input parameter, output parameter, or local tag. Also check if it will be required or visible. Use the context information to help you decide.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILe56r
15--22
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Value
Use?
A. State of the pushbutton that starts the motor
B. State of the pushbutton that stops the motor
C. State of the pushbutton that jogs the motor. You want the option to use a jog pushbutton or not use one based on the application. D. Bit that stores the combined status of the start and stop inputs. The instruction uses this bit and the jog input to determine whether to run the motor.
E. Bit that signals the motor to start
F. State of the motor’s auxiliary contact. It signals the instruction that the motor is running. You want the option to use the auxiliary contact or not based on the application. G. Timeout value in milliseconds to wait for the auxiliary contact to open or close. The instruction signals a fault if the contact doesn’t open or close within this time. You’ll use the auxiliary contact for some applications but not others. You also want to be able to set the timeout value based on the application. H. Bit that tells the instruction that you’re using the auxiliary contact of the motor. You don’t want to have to set this bit. You’ll set up the instruction’s logic to control this bit based on whether or not there’s a timeout value. I. Fault bit that shows you that the auxiliary contact timed out and the motor didn’t start or stop as commanded
J. Timer that creates a timeout for the auxiliary contact. You can easily write code to move the timeout value from above into the timer’s preset value.
K. Bit that you’ll turn on to clear the fault bit. You want to option to use it or not.
How Did You Do?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Required?
Visible?
Turn to the Answers section.
Rev. August 2012 AOILe56r
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Exercise B
15--23
In this exercise, you will practice deciding if an add-on instruction needs an EnableInFalse routine. Directions: For the situations below, decide if you need an EnableInFalse routine for the add-on instruction. 1. You plan to execute the instruction all the time and won’t use any input conditions to disable it, like this:
Do you need an EnableInFalse routine?
-
Yes No
2. The instruction controls a motor. You plan to execute the instruction conditionally, like this:
Do you need an EnableInFalse routine?
-
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Yes No
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILe56r
15--24
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Exercise C
In this exercise, you will practice creating and using an add-on instruction. Context: In Exercise A, you made some decisions about the parameters for a motor starter instruction. Now develop the instruction in RSLogix 5000 software and verify that it works correctly. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the AOIL_1756R_C1.acd project file. 2. Create the definition for the add-on instruction: Property
Value
Name
Motor_Starter
Description
Starts and stops a motor
Type
Ladder diagram
Open Logic Routine
Yes
Open Definition
Yes
3. Open the Start_Stop_Motor_Routine in the unscheduled programs folder:
4. Copy all the rungs from the Start_Stop_Motor_Routine and paste them into the Logic routine of the Motor_Starter instruction.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILe56r
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
15--25
The Logic routine of the Motor_Starter instruction should look like this:
5. Create these parameters and local tags for the Motor_Starter instruction: Name
Usage
Alias for
Data type
Description
Stop
Input parameter
BOOL
Enter the tag that gives the stop command for the motor.
Start
Input parameter
BOOL
Enter the tag that gives the start command for the motor.
Jog
Input parameter
BOOL
Jog command for the motor. To jog the motor, turn on this bit. To stop the jog, turn off this bit.
AuxContact
Input parameter
BOOL
Auxiliary contact of the motor. Make sure you set the FaultTime. Otherwise, this input doesn’t do anything.
ClearFault
Input parameter
BOOL
To clear the fault of the motor, turn on this bit.
Out
Output parameter
BOOL
Output command to the motor starter. If on, the motor starts. If off, the motor stops.
Fault
Output parameter
BOOL
If on, the motor didn’t start or stop.
Fault_Time
Input parameter
DINT
Enter the time (ms) to wait for the auxiliary contact to open or close. The Fault bit turns on when that time is up.
RunCommand
Local tag
BOOL
CheckAuxContact
Local tag
BOOL
FaultTimer
Local tag
TIMER
Rev. August 2012
Fault_Timer.PRE
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILe56r
15--26
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
6. Click the Help tab of the instruction’s definition to see how the instruction looks. It should look like this:
7. Verify the routine and correct any errors. 8. Enter an instance of the Motor_Starter instruction into the MainRoutine of the MainProgram: Create this tag. Use the Motor_Starter data type.
Assign these tags. They’re already created for you.
Where this tag . . .
Is tied to this workstation device . . .
And simulates . . .
DI12_Stop
Switch DI12
Stop pushbutton for the motor
DI0_Start
Pushbutton DI0
Start pushbutton for the motor
DO1_Motor
Light DO1
Motor
9. Save the project. 10. Download the project to the controller in slot 1 of your workstation. 11. Put the controller in Run mode.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILe56r
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
15--27
12. Test the operation of Motor_Starter_01: Do this . . .
And check that this happens . . .
A. Turn on DI12
Nothing. This simulates the normally closed position of the stop pushbutton.
B. Press DI0
DO1 turns on — the motor starts.
C. Turn off DI12
DO1 turns off — the motor stops.
D. Turn on DI12
Nothing. This simulates the normally closed position of the stop pushbutton.
13. Add a rung of logic that lets Motor_Starter_01 read the state of DI13_Aux_Contact. This simulates using the auxiliary contact of the motor. 14. Add a rung of logic that turns on DO2_Fault if the fault bit of Motor_Starter_01 turns on. 15. Set the Fault_Time parameter of Motor_Starter_01 to 1000 ms. Make sure you set the Fault_Time for this instance of the instruction. Don’t change the definition. 16. Test that Motor_Starter_01 sets it’s fault bit if the auxiliary contact of the motor doesn’t close: Do this . . .
And check that this happens . . .
A. Make sure DI12 is on.
Nothing. This simulates the normally closed position of the stop pushbutton.
B. Press DI0 and then immediately turn on DI13.
DO1 turns on — the motor starts.
C. Turn off DI12 and then immediately turn off DI13.
DO1 turns off — the motor stops.
D. Turn on DI12.
Nothing. This simulates the normally closed position of the stop pushbutton.
E. Press DI0 but leave DI13 turned off.
DO1 turns on — the motor gets the command to start. DO2 turns on — the motor didn’t start. DO1 turns back off — the instruction clears the start command.
F. Go to the properties of Motor_Starter_01 and clear the Fault bit.
DO2 turns off.
How Did You Do?
Turn to the Answers section.
Exercise D
In this exercise, you will practice exporting and importing an add-on instruction. Context: In Exercise C, you made made an add-on instruction that controls a motor. Now export the instruction and import it into another project. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILe56r
15--28
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Directions: 1. Export the Motor_Starter instruction. 2. Close the RSLogix project but leave RSLogix 5000 software open. 3. Open the AOIL_1756R_D2.acd project file. 4. Import the Motor_Starter instruction.
How Did You Do?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Turn to the Answers section.
Rev. August 2012 AOILe56r
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Rev. August 2012
15--29
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILe56r
15--30
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
Answers
Exercise A
Value
Use?
A. State of the pushbutton that starts the motor
n Input parameter
B. State of the pushbutton that stops the motor
n Input parameter
C. State of the pushbutton that jogs the motor
n Input parameter
D. Bit that stores the combined status of the start and stop inputs. E. Bit that signals the motor to start
Output parameter
Local tag
Output parameter
Local tag
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
G. Timeout value in milliseconds to wait for the auxiliary contact to open or close. H. Bit that tells the instruction that you’re using the auxiliary contact of the motor.
n Output parameter
n
n
It’s an input parameter because you pass this value into the instruction. Make it required so you can assign the tag for the pushbutton directly to the parameter. All required parameters are also visible.
It’s an input parameter because you pass this value into the instruction. It’s not required or visible because you want the option to use it or not based on the application.
This is a storage bit that the instruction’s logic sets based on other parameters. Make it a local tag since you don’t need to access it.
n
It’s an output parameter because the instruction returns this value based on input conditions. Make it required so you can assign the tag for the motor directly to the parameter.
It’s an input parameter because you pass this value into the instruction. It’s not required or visible because you want the option to use it or not based on the application.
It’s an input parameter because you want to be able to set the timeout value based on the application.
It’s an internal storage bit. There’s no need to access it.
n
The instruction returns this value. It’s visible but not required because you only want to see its state on the instruction. You don’t want to have to assign it to a tag.
There’s no need to access the timer.
You want to be able to see it, but you also don’t want to have to use it.
n
n
n
Local tag
n Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
n Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
Input parameter
Output parameter
n Local tag
Input parameter
Local tag
J. Timer that creates a timeout for the auxiliary contact
Input parameter
Output parameter
n Output parameter
Reason It’s an input parameter because you pass this value into the instruction. Make it required so you can assign the tag for the pushbutton directly to the parameter. All required parameters are also visible.
Input parameter
I. Fault bit that shows you that the auxiliary contact timed out
K. Bit that you’ll turn on to clear the fault bit
Visible?
n Local tag
F. State of the motor’s auxiliary contact.
Required?
n Local tag n Input parameter
Output parameter
Local tag
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILe56r
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
15--31
Exercise B 1. No, you don’t need an EnableInFalse routine. The Logic routine will execute all the time since the rung condition will always be true. 2. Yes, you need the EnableInFalse routine if you use input conditions to make the rung false. In that case, use the EnableInFalse routine to reset outputs. Otherwise, the motor could be left running even when the rung goes false.
Exercise C 2. The New Add-On Instruction dialog box should look like this:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILe56r
15--32
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
5. The Motor_Starter parameters should look like this:
The local tags of the Motor_Starter instruction should look like this:
13. The logic must write the value of DI13_Aux_Contact to the AuxContact parameter of Motor_Starter_01:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILe56r
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
15--33
14. The logic must read the value of Motor_Starter_01.Fault:
15. Open the properties for Motor_Starter_01 and enter 1000 into Fault_Time:
Exercise D 4. The Add-On Instructions folder should look like this:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. AOILe56r
15--34
Exercise: Developing an Add-On Instruction in Ladder Diagram
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 AOILe56r
Lesson
16
Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to manage RSLogix 5000 project files by performing the following tasks: Export a .acd project file
Import a .l5k text file Import a .l5x XML file When You Will Do This Export an RSLogix 5000 project file when you want to back it up or save it for future use. Once you export it , you have to import it to use it again.
Before You Begin
File Storage RSLogix 5000 projects can be stored using the following file formats: .acd -- a standard file format .l5k -- an exported text file
.l5x -- an exported XML file
Tip "
Rev. August 2012
In any format, the entire project, including tags, documentation, ladder logic, etc. is contained in a single file.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. FI2sb56r
16--2
Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files
Exporting a .acd Project File
Add that some other software packages divide the components of a single project into separate files. In either format, the entire project, including tags, documentation, ladder logic, etc. is contained in a single file.
Using a Windowsr “save” procedure, a project is stored as a .acd file:
Mention that saving is just a standard Windows saving procedure. Other standard windows procedures, such as copying files, can be found in an appendix in the Procedures Guide.
Save
Bottling.acd
Because RSLogix 5000 projects contain tag names, the .acd files can be large.
Add that you should not open a project from a floppy disk or CD-ROM. By default, the software will attempt to save the file back to the disk, which will not work.
You cannot directly save a .acd file to a disk:
If you attempt to do so, you will receive an
error message indicating insufficient space on the disk, regardless of the size of the project file. To save to a disk, a project file must be saved to the hard drive and then copied to a disk.
When copying files from a CD-ROM, they will be marked “Read-Only”. To make the files useable, you must first copy them to the hard drive or network. Then you must clear the Read Only check box in the file properties. Note that in RSLogix 5000 software, version 10, the export process was optimized to reduce the amount of time required to perform a “Save As ” operation. Programs that contain a large quantity of tags with comments should have a significant decrease in the time required for exporting. Note that the original .acd file is still maintained as a separate file. Note that the .l5k file is close in size to a file that is compressed using the WinZip utility.
Tip "
Mention that when importing, if a file with the same name already exists, you will overwrite it. Mention that .l5x files can also be used to import and export project components such as routines, programs, phases, add-on instructions, and UDTs.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Using the Windows “Save As” procedure, a .acd file can be exported as a .l5k file, or text representation of the data for an entire project:
Bottling.acd
Export (Save As)
Bottling.l5k - Export File Original File Is Maintained
A .l5k project file is much smaller than a .acd file. A .acd file can also be exported as a .l5x file, or XML-tagged code of the data for an entire project:
Bottling.acd
Export (Save As)
Bottling.l5x - XML File Original File Is Maintained
Rev. August 2012 FI2sb56r
Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files
16--3
Importing a .l5k Text File To be used, a .l5k file must be imported. The original .l5k file will remain and a separate .acd project file will be created:
Bottling.l5k
Import (Open)
Bottling.acd - Import File (Original File Is Maintained)
Although you can change the extension of a project file through Windows Explorer, this is not recommended. To convert a file, use the import/export functions.
The required Import/Export version for RSLogix 5000 version 19 is 2.10. This version can be modified and saved in older text files:
RSLogix 5000 Software Version
Import/Export Version
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. FI2sb56r
16--4
Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files
Importing a .l5x XML File To be used, a .l5x file must be imported. The original .l5x file will remain and a separate .acd project file will be created:
Bottling.l5x
Import (Open)
Bottling.acd - Import File (Original File Is Maintained)
The .l5x file contains the project file in XML format, as shown in the following graphic:
XML project files can only be imported into projects created with RSLogix 5000 version 17 or above.
If students are familiar with Tip " add-on instructions, mention that starting with v.16, add-on instructions could be imported/exported using .l5x files. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
The .l5x file allows users to manipulate the application source using text editing tools; build tools to auto-generate projects; and extract or merge code fragments to build new projects. Rev. August 2012 FI2sb56r
Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files
16--5
Multiple Backup Files Call out the benefits of this feature: S
Allows you to back out of unwanted changes by moving to an earlier file
S
Reduces likelihood of lost work from disk or file corruption
Tip " Note that the Compare tool must be installed and launched separately from the main software. It is available on the RSLogix 5000 software CD-ROM (version 12 or later). Add that the report can be saved as an HTML file or XML file.
Rev. August 2012
By default, the software automatically saves incremental backup project (.acd) files: A backup file is created each time a “Save” operation is selected.
The quantity of files is configurable. The default is 3.
Files are stored in the same location as the original.
Compare Tool This tool allows you to perform project-to-project comparisons: Project structure
Tags and user-defined data types Programming logic Data values (optional)
Tip "
This tool can only be used for .acd files created in version 10 or later.
Tip "
The report can be saved as an HTML file or XML file.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. FI2sb56r
16--6
Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files
Here’s How
To manage RSLogix 5000 project files by performing the following tasks: Export a .acd project file Import a .l5k text file Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the CCP143_1756r_DEM2.acd project during the demonstration.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
Directory where the export and import files can be found
-
Files of Type drop down list
-
How to examine files sizes using Windows Explorer
Rev. August 2012 FI2sb56r
Exercise: Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files
16--7
Exercise: Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice managing RSLogix 5000 project files. Context: You need to save and store a copy of an original HVAC file for future reference. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the FI2_1756r_A1.acd file. 2. Examine some of the file to become familiar with its contents. 3. Export the project file as a .l5k file. 4. Export the project as a .l5x file.
Tip "
Save the project using the same name. Save it in the default project directory. 5. Open Windowsr Explorer. 6. Locate the RSLogix 5000 software default project directory. 7. From the View drop-down list or using the toolbar icon shown below, select Details so that the file sizes and dates of the projects are displayed.
8. Under the Size column, compare the sizes of the FI2_1756R_A1 standard file (.acd) the text file (.l5k), and the XML file (.l5x).
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. FI2e56r
16--8
Exercise: Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files
9. What are the file sizes?
10. From Windows Explorer, open the .l5k file. 11. In the text file, list the following elements: A. RSLogix 5000 software version:
B. Import/Export version:
C. Major revision:
D. Minor revision:
E. Chassis size:
12. How would you find the elements listed in Step 11. using the .acd file?
13. Which file would be easier for you to modify?
14. Close the file. 15. Open a new instance of RSLogix 5000 and import the .l5k file.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 FI2e56r
Exercise: Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files
16--9
16. Open the .l5x file to see how its structure is different from the .l5k text file. 17. Open a new instance of RSLogix 5000 and import the .l5x file.
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. FI2e56r
16--10
Exercise: Managing RSLogix 5000 Project Files
Answers
Exercise A 9. The approximate size of the .acd file is 400KB. The approximate size of the .l5k file is 20KB. The approximate size of the .l5x file is 65KB. 11. The text file uses this format:
RSLogix 5000 Software Version
Import/Export Version Major Revision
Major Revision Chassis Size
Minor Revision
12. Using the .acd file, you can find the RSLogix 5000 software version from the Help menu. The Major revision, minor revision, and chassis size information can be accessed using the Controller Properties feature. The import/export version is not viewable from the .acd file. 13. For some, RSLogix 5000 .acd files may be easier to modify because of the graphical nature. For others, text files may be easier to modify. XML files can offer more flexibility when reusing code. Remember that text files and XML files cannot be downloaded directly to a controller.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 FI2e56r
Lesson
17
Allocating Connections in a Logix5000 System What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to allocate communications connections in a Logix5000 system by performing the following actions: Determine the number of connections used by a Logix5000 controller Conserve the number of connections used by a Logix5000 controller
Check connections in RSLogix 5000 with the Task Monitor tool When You Will Do This Depending on the size of your system, you may need to consider how you allocate connections to stay within limits.
Before You Begin Clarify that a connection is a completed communications link and not a physical connection on a network.
Connections A connection is an established communications link between two devices or components in a Logix5000 system. Connections may take many forms, including the following: Controller to I/O (local or remote) Controller to communications modules
Produced tag controller to consumed tag controller Message source controller to message destination Connection Limits Have students find the manual and use it for the steps below. Give them a few minutes to look through the tables.
Reference: Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations, 1756--RM094 1. Go to the Logix5000 Controller Resources chapter. 2. Go to the Controller Connections section. 3. Briefly read the tables on connection limits for controllers and communication modules.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CO2sb56r
17--2
Allocating Connections in a Logix5000 System
Conserving Connections by Grouping Produced Data To minimize the number of produced tags and therefore the number of connections, data can be grouped into an array or a user-defined structure and then produced.
When reviewing the table, note if the producer used 250 produced and consumed connections, there would be no room for I/O modules.
? What is an array? Answer: A numerically indexed sequence of tags, for example, Size[3,5].
? What is a user-defined structure? Answer: A data type (similar to a timer) made of members different data types. The user-defined data type is also referred to as a user-defined structure.
? Could you make an array within this data type?
Answer: Yes. You can embed a one-dimensional array of certain data types (such as Dint) within a user-defined data type. Here you could make an array of four Dints for the Height, Width, W_Flag, and L_Flag.
The array or user-defined structure must be less than 500 bytes.
Example: Connection Requirements for Tags vs. an Array Producing 5 individual tags for two consumers each requires 15 connections, as shown in the following table: Source Tags
Produced Tags
Connections
Height (Dint)
Height
3 (1 tag plus 2 consumers)
Width (Dint)
Width
3
Weight (Real)
Weight
3
W_Flag (Dint)
W_Flag
3
L_Flag (Dint)
L_Flag
3 15 connections
Producing 1 user-defined data type requires only 3 connections, as shown in the following table: Load_Info User-Defined Data Type Source Tags Height (Dint) Width (Dint) Weight (Real) W_Flag (Dint) L_Flag (Dint)
Produced Tag Load_Info (user-defined data type made of source tags)
Connections
3 (1 tag plus 2 consumers)
3 connections
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CO2sb56r
Allocating Connections in a Logix5000 System
17--3
Message Connections Note that the cache bit is set or cleared in the Message Configuration dialog box, which is accessed through the ellipses button in the MSG instruction. Note that opening a new connection for each message execution increases execution time.
Some types of messages always require a connection. Other messages (such as a CIP messages) maintain the connection based on the configuration of the cache bit: Clear the cache bit for infrequent messages. This closes the connection when not in use and frees it for other operations. Set the cache bit for continuous messages.
Continuous Connection
Here’s How IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids.
To determine the number of connections used by a Logix5000 controller. Reference: Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations, 1756--RM094 1. Go to the Determine Total Connection Requirements section.
To demonstrate, tally the connections for an example system this way:
2. Briefly read the tables for local and remote connection tallies.
1. Describe a device and its quantity and have the students determine the connection type and total connection from the tables.
3. Use the tables to tally the connections for an example system your instructor gives you.
2. Continue giving them examples of devices and quantities until you’ve tallied the connections for your example system. 3. Count the tallies to determine the total connections fro the system.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CO2sb56r
17--4
Allocating Connections in a Logix5000 System
Here’s How
To check connections in RSLogix 5000 with the Task Monitor tool.
IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Use the steps below to help guide you during the demonstration: 1.
From the tools menu select Logix5000 Task Monitor.
2.
Under Communications select Monitor.
3.
From the RSWho screen select the processor you want to monitor.
4.
From the Logix5000 task Monitor Screen select the Networking Tab.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CO2sb56r
Exercise: Allocating Connections in a Logix5000 System
17--5
Exercise: Allocating Connections in a Logix5000 System Exercise A
In this group exercise, you will practice allocating connections used by a Logix5000 controller. You have just completed a basic project. You now need to determine the number of connections used by the controller in slot 1. Refer to the CO2_1756r_A1.acd file and the following key points:
There are 4 local modules and 1 remote I/O module. There is 1 local and 1 remote ControlNet communication module. There are 2 produced tags: -- Initialize System (produced for 1 local and 1 remote controller) -- Station_Data_For_Quality (produced for 1 local controller) There is 1 consumed tag: Stations_Off_Quality.
There are 2 messages (1 Data Table Read and 1 CIP Generic). Directions: 1. Tally the connections for the controller. 2. Producing 6 individuals tags for two consumers each requires 18 connections. How could the number of connections be reduced to 3?
3. Using direct connections, 2 connections are used to communicate with 2 remote 1756 digital I/O modules and 1 remote ControlNet communication module. If the communication format was changed to Rack optimization, how many connections would be established?
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CO2e56r
17--6
Exercise: Allocating Connections in a Logix5000 System
Answers
Exercise A 1. Your answer should be similar to the following example: Connection Type
Device Quantity
Connections per Module
Total Connections
Local I/O module (direct connections)
4
1
4
SERCOS Motion module
0
3
0
Local ControlNet communication module
1
0
0
Local EtherNet/IP communication module
0
0
0
Local DeviceNet communication module
0
2
0
Local DH+/Remote I/O communication module
0
1
0
Local DH--485 communication module
0
1
0
RSLogix 5000 software access to controller
1
1
1
Remote ControlNet communication module
1
0
0
Remote EtherNet/IP communication module
0
0
0
Other remote communication adapter
0
1
0
Remote I/O modules (direct connections)
1
1
1
Produced tags
--
--
--
Produced tag and first consumer
2
2
4
Each additional consumer
1
1
1
Consumed tags
1
1
1
Connected message (CIP Data Table Read/Write and DH+)
2
1
2
Block-transfer message
0
1
0 14
2. Grouping the data into an array or user-defined data type would reduce the number of connections to 3 (1 tag plus 2 consumers). 3. Rack optimization would consolidate the connections into a single connection. Data would be sent at one rate specified by the ControlNet module.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CO2e56r
Lesson
18
Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project What You Will Learn
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Modify the default task, program, and routine Add a local 1756-I/O module to an I/O configuration
Rev. August 2012
Create a tag in the Edit Tags list Define alias tags Draft simple ladder logic Enter and edit ladder logic components Verify a project Select and change a controller’s operating mode Download a project to a Logix5000t controller Create an event task Copy and reuse ladder components Modify a communications path Create a communications path Configure a controller to produce and consume data
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. INPsb56r
18--2
Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 INPsb56r
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
18--3
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice skills used in developing an RSLogix 5000 project. Context: You have completed and tested the basic project for Line_A. Now you have been asked to duplicate this logic for Line_B. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Open the INP_1756r_A1.acd file.
Tip "
If you are using a ControlNet network, open the INP_1756r_A3.acd file. 2. Add an analog output module to slot 7 of the I/O configuration. The following table outlines the parameters for the module: Scaling Catalog Number
Channel
High Signal
High Eng.
Low Signal
Low Eng.
10.0
10.0
0.0
0.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
0.0
0 OF6VI (0--10V) 1
Alarms
Limits
High High High Low Low Low ----
High Clamp
------
Low Clamp 10 --10 10 --10
3. Modify the configuration of the local and remote communication modules within the I/O Configuration to match the configuration of your workstations. 4. From within the tag editor of the Line_A program, create a program-scoped tag named Meter. This tag should be an alias for the channel 0 analog output data. Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. INPe56r
18--4
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
5. Draft ladder logic in the Process_Order routine that will move the accumulated value of the Order_Counter tag into the new Meter tag. 6. Edit the XIO instruction in rung 3 of the Process_Order routine and change it to an XIC instruction. 7. Create a Line_B program. 8. Copy the program-scoped tags from the Line_A program and paste them into the Line_B program. 9. Copy the routines from the Line_A program and paste them into the Line_B program. 10. Configure the MainRoutine as the main routine in the Line_B program. 11. For these slot 1 program-scoped tags, re-assign the alias information to the correct I/O points based on the following chart: Routine Name
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Tag Name
LineA I/O Point (Line_A Program)
LineB I/O Point (Line_B Program)
Read_Order
Read_Order
Local:2:I.Data.0
Local:2:I.Data.4
Process_Order
Apply_Paint
Local:0:O.Data.3
Local:0:O.Data.4
Process_Order
Meter
Local:7.O.Ch0Data
Local:7.O.Ch1Data
Process_Order
Order_In_Progress
Local:0:O.Data.0
Local:0:O.Data.1
Process_Order
Process_Order
Local:2:I.Data.1
Local:2:I.Data.5
Process_Order
Shrink_Wrap
Local:4.O.Data.6
Local:4.O.Data.7
Rev. August 2012 INPe56r
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
Tip "
Devices on the standard workstation are arranged and wired in the following manner:
DI0 DO0
DI1 DO3
DI2 DO6
DI4 DO1
DI5 DO4
DI6 DO7
AI0
AO0
Analog Meter
Analog Meter
Digital Outputs Analog Outputs
Label
Description
Slot
I/O Tag
DI4 DI5 DO1 DO4 DO7
Digital Input 4 Digital Input 5 Digital Output 1 Digital Output 4 Digital Output 7
2 2 0 0 4
Local:2:I.Data.4 Local:2:I.Data.5 Local:0:O.Data.1 Local:0:O.Data.4 Local:4:O.Data.7
AO1
Analog Output 1
7
Local:7:O.Ch1Data
Tip "
Analog Input AI1
AO1
Digital Inputs
18--5
Analog Input
I/O Tag for Alternate Wiring
This chart lists controller-scoped base tags (no alias information) in the slot 1 controller: Program Name
Routine Name
Tag Name
Line_A
Read_Order
MSG_Read_LineA
Line_B
Read_Order
MSG_Read_LineB
Line_A
Read_Order
Order_QuantityA
Line_B
Read_Order
Order_QuantityB
12. Cross-reference the MSG_Read_LineA tag and go to the rung within the Line_B program that uses this tag. 13. Modify the message instruction on the rung you identified in the previous step by performing the following: Configure the control tag MSG_Read_LineB as the message control tag for this instruction. Configure the message type to be a CIP Data Table Read. Configure Order_QuantityB as the Source and Destination Element for the message instruction. Configure the communication path to point to the controller in slot 3 of the remote workstation. 14. Within the same rung as the message instruction, make the Order_QuantityB tag the source tag for the move instruction. Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. INPe56r
18--6
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
15. Within the same rung as the message instruction, change the operand of the XIC instruction that utilizes the MSG_Read_LineA.DN tag to the MSG_Read_LineB.DN tag. 16. Cross-reference the MSG_Read_LineA tag and go to the rung within the Line_A program that utilizes this tag. 17. Modify the communications path of the MSG_Read_LineA message control tag to point to the remote controller in slot 3 18. Verify your changes and correct any errors. 19. Download the project to the controller in slot 1. 20. Place the controller in Remote Run mode.
Tip "
If you are using ControlNet, you may need to reschedule the network. 21. Open another instance of RSLogix 5000 software. 22. Import the INP_1756r_A2.l5k file. 23. Create the Order_QuantityB tag and make it an alias for AI1. 24. Save your work and download the INP_1756r_A2.acd file to the controller in slot 3 of the remote workstation. 25. To test your work, verify that the Line_A program of the project functions as follows:
B C, H
D E
A
F G
Remote Workstation Analog Meter
Analog Meter
Analog Input
Analog Input
A. Set the potentiometer in the remote workstation to the desired order quantity (the range is 0 to 10). B. Push the Read Order button (DI0) of the local workstation. C. The Order_In_Progress (DO0) light in the local workstation should now be on. D. Push the Process_Order button (DI1) in the local workstation.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 INPe56r
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
18--7
E. The Apply_Paint light (DO3) should go on and off the number of times you have requested from the Order_Quantity potentiometer in the remote workstation. F. Each time a part is painted, the Meter should increment. G. When all parts have been painted, the Shrink_Wrap light (DO6) should go on for two seconds. H. Once the Shrink_Wrap has been applied, the Order_In_Progress (DO0) light should turn off. 26. To test your work, verify that the Line_B program of the project functions as follows:
B C, H
D E
Analog Meter
G F
Analog Input A
Analog Meter
Remote Workstation
Analog Input
A. Set the potentiometer in the remote workstation to the desired order quantity (the range is 0 to 10). B. With the controller in slot 3 of the remote workstation pulled out of the chassis, push the Read_Order button (DI4) of the local workstation. Explain why the Order_In_Progress light in the local workstation does not go on:
C. Now insert the controller back into slot 3 and push the Read_Order button again. The Order_In_Progress light should now be on.
Tip "
You may need to re-download the INP_1756r_A2.acd file to the controller in slot 3 if the project was lost while the controller was removed. If this is the case, press Read_Order button (DI4) again. D. Push the Process_Order button (DI5).
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. INPe56r
18--8
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
E. The Apply_Paint light should go on and off the number of times you have requested from the Order_Quantity potentiometer in the remote workstation. F. Each time a part is painted, the Meter should increment. G. When all parts have been painted, the Shrink_Wrap light should go on for two seconds. H. Once the Shrink_Wrap has been applied, the Order_In_Progress (DO0) light should turn off. 27. The shrink wrap roll must be measured continuously so that if it is low, it can be re-filled immediately. A photoeye (at DI8) is in place to detect sufficient width on the roll. If this sensor goes on, the event task must be triggered. Configure this new event task named Refill_Shrink_Wrap in the slot 1 controller.
Tip "
Continue using the existing INP_1756r_A1.acd or INP_1756r_A3 file. 28. When the event task executes, it must increment a tag that tracks the number of times the event task has executed. This tag is called Event_Task_Count. Program the necessary logic for this in the MainRoutine inside the MainProgram of the Event task you created. 29. Produce the Event_Task_Count tag from the slot 1 controller, and consume it from the slot 3 controller.
How Did You Do?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Turn to the Answers section.
Rev. August 2012 INPe56r
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
Rev. August 2012
18--9
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. INPe56r
18--10
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
Answers
Exercise A 2. The main configuration screens for the analog module are shown in the following graphics:
(Continued)
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 INPe56r
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
Rev. August 2012
18--11
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. INPe56r
18--12
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
4. The tag properties for Meter should look like the following example:
5. The following ladder logic was entered to move the accumulator value into the Meter tag:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 INPe56r
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
18--13
6. The rung should look similar to the following example:
9. The Tasks folder within the Controller Organizer should like similar to the example below:
10. MainRoutine should now be the main routine for the Line_B program:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. INPe56r
18--14
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
11. Your Line_B Program Tags editor should now look similar to the following:
12. You should find the MSG_Read_LineA tag located on rung 0 of the Read_Order routine within the Line_B program:
13. Your message instruction should now have MSG_Read_LineB as the message control tag:
(Continued)
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 INPe56r
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
18--15
Your message instruction configuration should look similar to the following:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. INPe56r
18--16
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
15. The rung with the message instruction in the Line_B program should be configured similar to the following:
17. Your MSG_Read_LineA tag should be configured as follows:
23. Your Order_QuantityB tag should be configured similar to the following:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 INPe56r
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
18--17
26. B. The Order_In_Progress light will not come on if the controller in slot 3 is removed because the logic tests for the done bit of a message instruction to that controller in slot 3. If the controller is not there, the done bit will not go high. 27. The following examples show the event task configuration and the Shrink_Wrap_Low tag alias information:
28. Your ladder logic should be similar to the example below:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. INPe56r
18--18
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
29. The following example shows the produced tag in the slot 1 controller:
The following example shows the slot 3 I/O configuration for an EtherNet/IP network:
(Continued)
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 INPe56r
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
18--19
The following example shows the slot 3 I/O configuration for a ControlNet network:
Tip "
Your ControlNet node numbers may vary based on network configuration. The following example shows the consumed tag in the slot 3 controller:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. INPe56r
18--20
Exercise: Integrated Practice — Developing an RSLogix 5000 Project
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 INPe56r
Optional Lesson
19
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network What You Will Learn Important: If this lesson is part of a national school and you are using EtherNet/IP for remote data sharing, this lesson can be skipped. Stress that ControlNet and EtherNet/IP are two Logix5000 networks designed to share data between multiple controllers in remote chassis or between a controller and I/O in remote chassis. Note that 1756-remote I/O will be introduced in a separate lesson.
Before You Begin
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Add a ControlNet communication module to an I/O configuration
Add a controller to an I/O configuration Schedule a new ControlNet network When You Will Do This Use the procedures in this lesson when you have to pass interlock data between controllers over an ControlNet network.
Key Terms The following terms are defined as they relate to a ControlNet network in a Logix5000 system:
Remind students that the ControlNet network is the technology of the backplane in a network.
Determinism: The ability to reliably predict when data will be delivered. Repeatability: Transfer times that are constant and unaffected by devices connecting to or leaving the network.
In the graphic, review the devices on the ControlNet network. Cite specific examples.
Producer/Consumer Model: A communications network model in which nodes on a network can simultaneously receive the same data from a single source. ControlNet Network: A communications network used for transmitting time-critical and non-time critical data on the same link.
ControlNet Nodes Note that the 1784-PCICS card is used for computers with faster processing speeds. If you do not have these cards available but there is a Logix5000 system on the network with an EtherNet/IP card, you can use EtherNet/IP as a bridge to the ControlNet network when working with RSNetWorx for ControlNet software.
The physical ControlNet network in a Logix5000 system can contain the following nodes: A 1784-KTCX15 or 1784-PCIC(S) card to access the network from a desktop computer
A 1784-PCC (PCMCIA) card to access the network from a laptop computer A configured ControlNet module in a Logix5000 chassis
ControlNet-compatible devices Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2sb56r
19--2
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Common nodes that are connected to a ControlNet network using a cable system are shown in the following graphic: Computer
ControlLogix System
ControlLogix System
ControlNet Network VersaView Operator Interface
PLC-5/40C Controller
CompactLogix System
ControlLogix System
Over a ControlNet network, a Logix5000 controller can share data with the following controllers: Another Logix5000 controller (remote)
A CompactLogix controller A PLC-5C processor An SLC 500 processor There can be up to 99 nodes on a ControlNet network. Nodes on a ControlNet network must meet the following requirements: Nodes must be in the range of 1 to 99.
Node numbers cannot be duplicated. Node zero is invalid. Lowest keeper-capable node number (the keeper) in the system
receives information from RSNetWorx for ControlNet software:
-- The keeper is not a master. -- The keeper only grants access to the network. -- The keeper maintains the ControlNet schedule.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CN2sb56r
19--3
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Cable System Point out each component of the ControlNet cable system connecting workstations in the classroom. If you have a repeater, show it to the students.
Nodes on the ControlNet network must be connected using a ControlNet cable system. The following graphic is an example of a ControlNet cable system and some of its components: Trunk Cable Section Connectors
Segment
Tap
Terminator Repeater
Node
Note that the components of the ControlNet network are carefully selected by the network designers to accommodate the current (and future) needs of the network. Exceeding the length of cable or the number of taps may cause degradation of the signal and eventual failure. Note that repeaters do not just amplify the signals, they recreate them (and therefore add some latency). Repeaters can be purchased to create coax-to-coax, coax-to-fiber, or fiber-to-fiber links.
This cable system contains the following basic components: Taps with no minimum spacing requirements
Cable connectors Trunk cable: -- RG-6 coax cable or special-use cable -- 1000 m with 2 devices and 250 m with 48 devices -- Each tap subtracts 16.3 m from allowable segment length -- Flexible topology including bus, tree, and/or star Terminators Repeaters, depending on the design Up to 99 nodes can be connected on a ControlNet network. 48 nodes can exist on one segment; after 48, a repeater must be used.
Note that ControlNet is a proven network. Most problems occur in the installation or configuration.
Tip "
Show the front of a ControlNet module. Point out the channel A and B connectors and the RJ45 port.
Rev. August 2012
Cable system design and installation is extremely important. Most complications with ControlNet networks can be linked to the network installation.
The cable system is used for permanent nodes. An RJ45 port is available to connect a computer to the ControlNet module without breaking a connection or adding a new node to the cable system. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2sb56r
19--4
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Tip " Note that this document is part of the Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide.
For more information on the ControlNet cabling system, refer to the ControlNet Coax Cable System Planning and Installation Manual.
Network Services The ControlNet network’s function is to transmit the following two types of information on the same link: Scheduled (time-critical data) Unscheduled (non-time critical data) Scheduled Service Data that is sent across a network on a regular basis is transmitted as scheduled data. This data has the following characteristics: Is time critical, such as I/O status and control interlocking data
?What type of data would be
considered time critical for your application?
Has top priority in information exchange Occurs in the same time frame during every data transmission interval
Can be any of the following: -- Data from an I/O module -- Peer-to-peer interlocking data of controllers
Tip "
Components that have an associated RPI (Requested Packet Interval) send data as scheduled data. To control I/O or produce and consume tags in a Logix5000 application, scheduled data is required.
Unscheduled Service Stress that scheduled data, such as control and I/O data, is given highest priority on the ControlNet network. Other information, such as programming or upload and download operations, does not interfere with the transport of control and I/O data.
Non-deterministic data that is not time critical is transmitted as unscheduled data. This type of data has the following characteristics: Transmits after all scheduled data has been sent
Can be any of the following: -- Connection establishment -- Ladder-initiated, peer-to-peer messaging data (using a Message instruction)
-- Programming data (uploads and downloads)
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CN2sb56r
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
19--5
Information Exchange on the ControlNet Network Note that this is an overview of the data transfer process. Details will be given later in the lesson. Clarify that this is a ControlNet data exchange not a message (MSG) instruction.
The following graphic shows the transfer of information over the ControlNet network using the Producer/Consumer model: Establish Connection A producer sends a message to the target consumer by using a network address.
Note that the node number is part of the CID. The source and destination information is encoded in the CID.
Chalk Talk: To help students learn the many acronyms in this lesson, keep a running list on the end of the board. After learning a new acronym, have the students supply short descriptions to define the new acronym.
Communication
Close Connection
If the node needs the data, messages are then consumed.
The connection is closed.
The following statements describe information exchange on the ControlNet network: Data sent by a producer will contain a numeric identifier called a CID (Connection ID): -- This ID is created automatically when a ControlNet node is connected to the network. Nodes that have been configured to recognize a particular CID consume the data.
Access to the network is controlled by a time-slice algorithm. Network Parameters
Note that this section serves as an introduction to the parameters. Entering these parameters using RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will be presented later in this lesson.
To schedule the network for information exchange, values for the following network parameters must be selected: NUT
SMAX (Scheduled Maximum node) UMAX (Unscheduled Maximum node) Media Redundancy NUT (Network Update Time)
Add the term NUT to the acronym list on the board. Ask the students for a short definition. Note that the NUT represents the aspects of determinism and repeatability that set the ControlNet network apart from other networks. Add the term NUI to the acronym list on the board. Ask the students for a short definition.
Rev. August 2012
The NUT is the repeatable base time at which the network transmits data (scheduled, unscheduled, and maintenance data). The NUT has the following characteristics: A configuration of 2 to 100 milliseconds is possible for the NUT. The value of the NUT includes peer-to-peer, digital, and analog data. Data cannot be transferred faster than the NUT.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2sb56r
19--6
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Tip "
One occurrence of the NUT is referred to as a NUI (Network Update Interval). Example: NUT The priority of data transfer is shown in the following graphic:
? What will happen during the second NUI shown?
Answer: Data will be transmitted again in priority order.
NUT Scheduled Operations
Unscheduled Operations
Maintenance Update (Guardband)
Note that the maintenance update includes diagnostics and communications.
...
...
With the given guidelines in mind, the graphic illustrates that: Scheduled data is transmitted first, followed by unscheduled data and then maintenance data. When the NUT has occurred, the transmissions start over. SMAX (Scheduled Maximum Node) Add the term SMAX to the acronym list on the board. Ask the students for a short definition. Mention that it is inefficient to schedule a computer. Instead, assign computers your highest node numbers.
State that for an efficient network, node numbers should be assigned sequentially starting at 1. The maximum scheduled node should be set to the highest number node that will need to transmit scheduled data.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
The SMAX is the maximum node number (1 to 99) that can transmit and receive data during the scheduled portion of the NUT. Keep in mind the following guidelines when determining the SMAX value: Nodes at or below the maximum scheduled node transmit every NUT in the same sequential order (i.e., 1, 2, 3, then 1, 2, 3 . . .).
All nodes sending time-critical data should be at or below the
SMAX. Each node falling under SMAX can transmit up to 510 bytes of data during its turn: -- More than 500 bytes can be sent by one node. However, only 500 bytes can be transferred at one slot time. -- The bandwidth in this portion of the NUT is reserved and configured in advance to support real-time data transfer. -- The boundary for the scheduled portion of the NUT will move depending on the use of bandwidth. Slot time is the calculated time a node will wait for a missing address before taking its turn to transmit: -- Slot time is based on the physical attributes of the network including the cable length and the number of repeaters. Rev. August 2012 CN2sb56r
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
19--7
Example: SMAX Here is the order of scheduled data transfer: NUT
1
2
1 3
4...n
2
1 3
3
4...n
4...n
...
... SMAX
? Ask students to why it is inefficient not to assign nodes sequentially?
Answer: Because nodes will wait for other nodes to transmit. E.g., node five will wait the entire slot times for nodes one to four to transmit even if they are not assigned.
Slot Time
With the given guidelines in mind, the graphic illustrates that: The first network update interval (NUI) shows nodes (numbers) falling below SMAX sending scheduled messages. The second NUI shows the nodes below SMAX sending messages again starting over from the first scheduled node to SMAX. The third NUI shows a node (2) missing from the network. Therefore, node 3 will wait one time slot before it transmits data. UMAX (Unscheduled Maximum Node)
Add the term UMAX to the acronym list on the board. Ask the students for a short definition.
? What type of data might be included in the unscheduled portion of the NUT?
Answer: Unscheduled data can include connection establishment, peer-to-peer messaging data, programming, and ladder-initiated communications. Note that the 1784-KTCX15 driver node number default is set high, at 99. Suggest that students change this to a lower node number. Remind students that as with all node numbers that transmit and receive unscheduled data, the driver/computer node number must fall under the UMAX.
Rev. August 2012
The UMAX is the maximum ControlNet node number that can transmit and receive unscheduled data. Keep in mind the following guidelines when determining the value of the UMAX: The time remaining after the scheduled and maintenance portions of the NUT is allotted for unscheduled operations.
The right to transmit first in the unscheduled portion of the NUT rotates one node number per NUI (i.e., 1, 2, 3, then 2, 3, 4 . . .). The unscheduled portion of the NUT may not provide enough time for every node to transmit data during every NUT. A node will repeat transmission if there is time left in the NUT.
Nodes above the UMAX cannot communicate on the network. Leave room for laptops to attach using the RJ45 port. The added slot time will only affect the unscheduled service.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2sb56r
19--8
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Time-critical data must not be included in the unscheduled portion of the NUT, as it may not have the opportunity to be sent every NUT.
Example: UMAX
? If UMAX was reached in the second NUI, which node would transmit unscheduled data first in the third NUI?
Here is the rotating order of unscheduled data transfer: NUT
Answer: Node 1. In the graphic, point out that if time remains after the UMAX is reached, the remaining time starts over with node one (scheduled . . nodes).
7
.
8
8 9
9
9 10 11
1 2 10 3 11 12
...
UMAX
Point out in the graphic that node 7 transmits first in the first NUI, node 8 transmits first in the second NUI, and node 9 transmits first in the third NUI.
Note that to send data over 500 bytes in chunks, frame numbers are assigned to the data.
With the given guidelines in mind, the graphic illustrates that: The opportunity to transmit is passed on a rotating basis. In the third NUI, UMAX is reached. The remaining unscheduled time is now available to additional nodes on a sequential basis starting with node 1. An unscheduled message can transmit only 500 bytes per slot time. If the message is more than 500 bytes, the data will resume transmission on its next turn.
The same node can transmit both scheduled and unscheduled data. For example, the controller might produce a tag (scheduled) and send a message (unscheduled).
Media Redundancy
Add that all nodes on a network must be the same. That is, one node cannot be set for channel A and another node set for channel B. E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
The network must be configured for one of the following media redundancy options: A only, for one cable system using channel A B only, for one cable system using channel B
A and B, for redundant media Rev. August 2012 CN2sb56r
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
19--9
To ensure optimization of data transfer, an accurate representation of the media used on the network should be defined in RSNetWorx for ControlNet software.
Update Intervals The configured or requested node transmit time may be different than the actual transmit time, as described in the following intervals: RPI (Requested Packet Interval)
API (Actual Packet Interval) RPI (Requested Packet Interval) Add the term RPI to the acronym list on the board. Ask the students for a short definition.
Clarify that the RPI tells the modules when to multicast its data.
The RPI is a user-specified rate that is supplied when an I/O module or ControlNet module is configured. The RPI defines how long the module will wait before multicasting its data. When determining the value of the RPI to enter in the I/O configuration, note the following: Each node may have different requirements for sending data within the NUT.
It is inefficient to send all data at the same rate. A node can support more than one rate depending on the data being sent.
RPI must be greater than or equal to the NUT. API (Actual Packet Interval) Add the term API to the acronym list on the white board. Ask the students for a short definition.
The API is the actual resulting interval. It can be described as follows: This rate is based on the NUT and is less than or equal to the RPI. This rate supports values that are binary multiples (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128) of the NUT. ControlNet networks will always meet or beat the RPI:
-- If the RPI is 20 ms and the nut is 8 ms, the API will be 16 ms (faster) because it cannot release at 20 ms.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2sb56r
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
19--10
Example: RPI and API After reviewing the graphic and the corresponding statements, ask the students to determine the API for the following RPI rates: 1. 100 ms
Answer: 64 ms
2. 31 ms
Answer: 16 ms
3. 2 ms
Answer: 2 ms
After reviewing RPI and API, test the students’ understanding of the first half of the lesson, including the following key concepts: S
Producer/Consumer model
S
NUT, SMAX, UMAX, RPI, and API
Having a good understanding of the parameters of the ControlNet network is required to begin examining the software interfaces and configuration steps. Break: Note that the introduction of the ControlNet network concepts ends here. This is a good place to take a short break if necessary.
The requested transmit time versus the actual transmit time is illustrated in the following graphic: NUT = 2 ms RPI for discrete data = 10 ms 2 ms
2 ms
API for discrete data = 8 ms
2 ms
2 ms
2 ms Data
Data Interval 1
Interval 2
Interval 3
Interval 4
Interval 5
The example illustrates the following points: Discrete data has an RPI of ten milliseconds. The software generates an API of eight milliseconds (eight is the closest binary multiple that is less than ten). The data is sent every four NUTs.
Configuration Overview and Software Interfaces Note that this section is a general introduction to the flow of configuration procedures. The step-by-step details and software demonstrations will be presented in the Here’s How section. If this lesson is part of a national school, add that remote I/O will be discussed in a different lesson. Encourage students to ask any remaining questions from the Configuring a Logix5000 Controller to Produce and Consume Data lesson. Note that the connection will be made through a ControlNet or Ethernet network.
To schedule the ControlNet network in order to share data, it is necessary to complete the following procedures: 1. Create the required produced tag. 2. In the controller that is consuming the data, perform the following actions: A. Add the local ControlNet module to the I/O configuration. B. Add the remote ControlNet module to the I/O configuration. C. Add the producing controller to the I/O configuration. D. Create the required consumed tags. 3. Schedule the ControlNet network.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CN2sb56r
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Note that the controller was also added to the project to share data when producing and consuming tags across the backplane. However, the controller is now added under the remote CNB. In the graphic, point out that the remote module is node 2.
19--11
Adding a ControlNet Module and Controller to an I/O Configuration The following graphic is an example of a remote ControlNet module and remote controller added to an I/O configuration in RSLogix 5000 software:
Add that it is not necessary or even possible to add the controller running the project to the configuration.
Local ControlNet Module Remote ControlNet Module Remote (Producing) Controller
Produced and Consumed Tags Note that the produced and consumed tags are created just as they were created for transfers over the backplane.
Data that is shared over a ControlNet network must be transferred using produced tags and received (stored) in consumed tags. As with I/O modules, when configuring consumed tags, select an RPI that is greater than the NUT.
Scheduling a New ControlNet Network RSNetWorx for ControlNet software schedules a network and connects the local controller to any controllers or I/O modules in a remote chassis by performing the following actions: Create a graphical representation of your network configuration and configure the parameters that define your network. Analyze all of the intended traffic for the network and then determine if the requested amount of traffic is possible. Display the current percentage of capacity as well as the percentage of capacity that added traffic will cause: -- The user can then decide whether to adjust the requested traffic or schedule it. Download to network.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2sb56r
19--12
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Point out that the procedure for scheduling a ControlNet network is detailed in the Procedures Guide. Note that the steps will be demonstrated in the Here’s How section.
To read the connected nodes on the network and build a network diagram, an online connection must be established using RSNetWorx for ControlNet software:
Online Option Enable Edits Option
Online Bandwidth Percentages
Network Diagram
The online Average Scheduled Bandwidth percentage should not exceed 50% or 60%.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CN2sb56r
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Using the values in the Pending side of the graphic, review the following terms: S
NUT -- Data updates every 5 ms.
S
SMAX -- Up to 9 controllers or other scheduled devices.
S
UMAX -- Up to 24 programming or other nonscheduled devices.
Current Online Values
Note that the ControlNet scheduling information is saved in a .xc configuration file.
19--13
After going online, the NUT, SMAX, UMAX, and redundancy parameters are configured in RSNetWorx for ControlNet software:
Pending Changes
Each time an additional device is added to a scheduled network or an RPI value is changed, the ControlNet network must be rescheduled.
A controller must be in Program mode to be scheduled.
? What other main function
Tip "
requires RSLinx Classic software?
RSNetWorx software communicates with the controller through RSLinx Classic software.
Answer: Drivers are configured in RSLinx Classic software.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2sb56r
19--14
Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Here’s How
To configure a local Logix5000 controller to share data with a remote Logix5000 controller over a ControlNet network by performing the following tasks: Add a ControlNet module to an I/O configuration
Add a controller to an I/O configuration Schedule a new ControlNet network Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Be sure to use the CCP143_1756R_DEM6.acd file and CCP143_1756R_DEM7.acd file.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
Parent--child relationship of the ControlNet and the controller that you add to the I/O configuration
-
Produced and consumed tags that you create
-
Number of scheduled (SMAX) and the number of unscheduled (UMAX) nodes
-
Values of the ControlNet network after it is configured
Rev. August 2012 CN2sb56r
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
19--15
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice configuring a local Logix5000 controller to share data with a remote Logix5000 controller over a ControlNett network. Context: You have finished programming and testing a complete project for a production line. To increase productivity, the plant has set up a second production line. The second production line needs to receive (consume) the Pressure data from the first assembly line over a ControlNet network.
Production Line 2
Production Line 1
ControlNet Network Consumed
n Produced
When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. In this exercise, you will share data with the other workstation on your ControlNet network. Node 1 will produce data and node 2 will consume the data. Directions: 1. Open the CN2_1756r_A1.acd file (the producer controller.) 2. Create a user-defined data type called Station_Data that will store the following information from the local controller:
Rev. August 2012
Member
Data type
Description
AI0
REAL
Analog Input channel 0
AI1
REAL
Analog Input channel 1
DI
DINT
Digital Inputs
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2e56r
19--16
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
3. Create a controller scoped tag called Local_Station_Data with the following properties: Uses the Station_Data data type Produced for 1 controller 4. Enter ladder logic to copy your analog channel 0 data and channel 1 data as well as your discrete input data to the respective members of the Local_Station_Data tag. 5. Verify the project, correct any errors, and download the project to your local controller in slot 1. 6. Place the controller in slot 1 in Remote Run mode. 7. Open the CN2_1756r_A2.acd file (the consumer controller.)
Tip "
This project will be downloaded to the controller in slot 3 of the remote workstation after you have completed the configuration. 8. Add the following modules to the I/O configuration (review workstation configuration for appropriate node addresses): A. Add the local (relative to the project’s controller) ControlNet module to the I/O configuration. B. Nested under the local ControlNet module, add the remote ControlNet module to the I/O configuration. C. Nested under the remote ControlNet module, add the controller in slot 1 of the remote workstation to the I/O configuration and call it Remote_Controller. 9. Copy the Station_Data UDT from producer and paste it to the consumer. 10. Consume the Local_Station_Data tag from the Remote_Controller by performing the following actions: Create a controller scoped tag called Remote_Station_Data that uses the Station_Data data type. Configure Remote_Station_Data as a consumed tag with a rate of 100 ms. 11. Enter ladder logic to copy the Remote_Station_Data tag to your analog channel 0 and analog channel 1 outputs. 12. Write the logic so that each of the green buttons pushed on your workstation will light the corresponding light on the remote workstation. 13. Verify the project, correct any errors, and download the project to the remote consumer controller in slot 3.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CN2e56r
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
19--17
Do not schedule the ControlNet network until both lines have downloaded the ladder logic. 14. When both production lines are ready, take turns scheduling the ControlNet network. 15. To verify that each production line is correctly configured to share data, complete the following actions: A. Verify that moving your analog channel 0 to the middle position moves the analog channel 0 meter on the remote workstation to its middle position. B. Verify that moving your analog channel 1 to the middle position moves the analog channel 1 meter on the remote workstation to its middle position. C. Verify that pushing the first four discrete buttons on your workstation light the corresponding lights on the remote workstation.
How Did You Do?
Rev. August 2012
Turn to the Answers section.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2e56r
19--18
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Answers
Exercise A 2. The user-defined data type should look similar to the following example:
3. The tag created should look similar to the following example:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CN2e56r
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
19--19
4. Your ladder logic should look similar to the following example:
8. The I/O configuration should look similar to the following example:
The node addresses of your ControlNet modules will vary based on your setup The slot 1 controller
9. The Station_Data UDT should now be found in the CN2_1756r_A2 project:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2e56r
19--20
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
10. The consumed tag should look similar to the following example:
11. Your ladder logic should look similar to the following example:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CN2e56r
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
19--21
12. Your ladder logic should look similar to the following example:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. CN2e56r
19--22
Exercise: Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 CN2e56r
Optional Lesson
20
Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network What You Will Learn Note that in the prerequisite ControlNet lesson, students learned to schedule a ControlNet network. In this lesson, students will practice rescheduling an existing network, a common and important task.
After completing this lesson, you should be able to: Add a remote 1756-I/O module to an I/O configuration Reschedule an existing ControlNett network
When You Will Do This RSLogix 5000 software lets you add your I/O configuration to the project before, during, or after you develop your application logic. Do this task when: Your I/O modules are connected to the controller by a ControlNet network, and Your system is installed or you have drawings and specifications that outline to location and configuration of your I/O modules
Before You Begin
ControlNet Remote I/O Configuring remote I/O using a ControlNet network requires the following tasks to be performed: 1. Add the local and remote ControlNet module to an I/O configuration.
In the standard school, note that the ControlNet network was previously scheduled. This lesson will provide an opportunity to reschedule the network -a common and important action.
2. Add a remote 1756-I/O module to an I/O configuration. 3. Schedule the ControlNet network. Here is a summary of when the data updates:
If data is multicast in the same chassis
For this remote module
If data Is transferred across a ControlNet network The RPI only determines when the owner controller receives the data over the network.
Digital Input
RPI and COS values define when the module multicasts data within its own chassis.
Digital Output
N/A
An output receives data from the owner-controller only at the RPI rate.
Analog Input
The RPI and RTS rates define when the module multicasts data within its own chassis.
The RPI only determines when the owner- controller receives the data over the network.
Analog Output
N/A
An output receives data from the owner-controller only at the RPI rate.
Rev. August 2012
" The timing may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI; however, the owner-controller will receive data at least as often as the RPI.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. RC2sb56r
20--2
Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network
Here’s How
To perform the following tasks: Add a remote 1756-I/O module to an I/O configuration Reschedule an existing ControlNet network Activity: As your instructor demonstrates these procedures, follow along in the associated job aid(s).
Demonstration Checklist IMPORTANT: To meet IACET CEU requirements and fully prepare certificate students for the final exam, you must demonstrate all lesson objectives using the proper job aids. Continue with the RSLogix 5000 project you used for sharing data over a ControlNet network. Note that if you saved the demonstration file from the Configuring Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network lesson, it is not required to configure the remote I/O module.
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Pay attention to these critical aspects of the demonstration: -
Location of the procedures in the job aid
-
Parent-child relationship with the ControlNet module and the remote modules
-
Module configuration, including the multicasting rates
-
Resulting module tags
Rev. August 2012 RC2sb56r
20--3
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network Exercise A
In this exercise, you will practice configuring a Logix5000 controller to communicate with a 1756-remote I/O module and reschedule the ControlNet network. Context: You have programmed a complete project. As a safety feature for plant personnel, you want to program an output light to be on when the production line is active. Because you have used your available I/O points in the local chassis, you must add a remote chassis to accommodate the additional I/O requirements. You are now ready to configure the controller to communicate with the 1756-remote I/O module. The setup of the remote output is shown in the following graphic: Production Line Active
Production Line
Local Chassis
Tip "
ControlNet Network
Remote Chassis
In this exercise, you will share data with another workstation on a ControlNet network. Your workstation will be the local chassis. The other workstation will be the remote chassis. When you see underlined text, refer to the related procedure or information in your job aid. Directions: 1. Download the Blank.acd file to the controller in slot 3. 2. Open the RC2_1756r_A1.acd file. 3. Add the local and remote ControlNet modules to the project I/O configuration. 4. Add and configure the remote output module in slot 4. You will be owning this module, which is located in the remote chassis.
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. RC2e56r
20--4
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network
5. Add the local input module that is in slot 2 to your I/O configuration. You will also be owning this module. 6. Make a new tag, DI12, an alias tag for bit 12 of the local digital input card in slot 2. 7. Make a new tag, DO11, an an alias tag for bit 11 of the remote digital output card in slot 4. 8. Enter the following ladder logic in your MainRoutine:
9. Download the project to the controller in slot 1 of the local chassis. Do not reschedule the ControlNet network until the projects have been downloaded to both the local and remote controllers.
10. When both lines are ready, reschedule the ControlNet network. 11. Test the project and verify that you have correctly configured the remote I/O by performing the following actions: A. Start the conveyor by energizing DI12. B. Verify that the remote I/O light DO11 on the other workstation is on. C. Turn off DI12 and verify that the remote I/O light on the other workstation is off. D. When the project functions correctly, go offline.
How Did You Do?
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Turn to the Answers section.
Rev. August 2012 RC2e56r
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network
Rev. August 2012
20--5
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. RC2e56r
20--6
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network
Answers
Exercise A 3. Your main configuration screen for the local ControlNet module in slot 5 should look similar to the example (The ControlNet node number will vary depending on your workstation setup.):
The remote ControlNet module is added to the I/O Configuration by right-clicking the ControlNet network icon displayed below the local ControlNet module:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 RC2e56r
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network
20--7
Your main configuration screen for the remote ControlNet module in slot 5 should look similar to the example (The ControlNet node address will vary depending on your workstation setup.):
4. Add the remote output module by right-clicking the backplane displayed beneath the remote ControlNet module:
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. RC2e56r
20--8
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network
Your main configuration screen for the remote output module in slot 4 should look similar to the example:
5. Your main configuration screen for the local input module in slot 2 should look similar to the example:
(Continued)
Your completed I/O Configuration within the Controller Organizer should look similar to the following:
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 RC2e56r
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network
20--9
10. If you did not receive the appropriate system response after rescheduling the ControlNet network, verify that you have completed the following actions: - Set the SMAX to be equal to the highest number node that can use scheduled time on the network - Set the UMAX to be equal to the highest number node that can use unscheduled time on the network - Reschedule the network if any changes were made after the first rescheduling
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. RC2e56r
20--10
Exercise: Communicating with a 1756-I/O Module Over a ControlNet Network
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 RC2e56r
Appendix
A
I/O Wiring Diagrams For The Assembly Application Slot 0 - 1756-OB16D Digital Output Module WORKSTATION LABEL DEVICE RED
+DC- 0 +DC- 0 +DC- 0 +DC- 0 +DC- 0 +DC- 0 +DC- 0
2
1
OUT- 0
G
DO0
4
3
OUT- 1
A
DO1
5
OUT- 2
R
10
7
OUT- 3
G
DO3
STATION OUTPUT (PRESS)
12
9
OUT- 4
A
DO4
STATION OUTPUT (STAKE)
11
OUT- 5
R
DO5
STATION OUTPUT (WELD)
6 8
14 16
+DC- 1
30
GND- 1 GND- 1 Not Used
32
BLACK
GND- 0 +DC- 1 +DC- 1 +DC- 1 +DC- 1 +DC- 1 +DC- 1
CONVEYOR
DO2
18 20 22 24 26 28
34 36
BLACK
RED
APPLICATION OUTPUT
A
- GREEN PILOT LIGHT - AMBER PILOT LIGHT
R
- RED PILOT LIGHT
G
24VDC
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. WDAa56r
A--2
I/O Wiring Diagrams For The Assembly Application
Slot 2 - 1756-IB16D Digital Input Module WORKSTATION DEVICE
BLACK
BLACK
2
1
4
3
6
5
GND- 0 GND- 1 GND- 1 GND- 1
8
7
10
9
12
11
IN- 4 IN- 5
14
13
IN- 6
GND- 1 GND- 2 GND- 2 GND- 2 GND- 2 GND- 3 GND- 3 GND- 3
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
IN- 7 IN- 8 IN- 9 IN- 10
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
GND- 3 GND- 3 NOT USED
32
31
34
33
IN- 11 IN- 12 IN- 13 IN- 14 IN- 15 NOT USED
36
35
NOT USED
DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12
APPLICATION OUTPUT
+24VDC
START
PART SENSOR FAULT RESET READ REMOTE TOTAL STOP
PART SENSOR
DI13 DI14 DI15
BLACK
BLACK
IN- 0 IN- 1 IN- 2 IN- 3
GND- 0 GND- 0 GND- 0
LABEL
- NORMALLY OPEN PUSHBUTTON - SELECTOR SWITCH
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 WDAa56r
I/O Wiring Diagrams For The Assembly Application
A--3
Slot 4 - 1756-OB16D Digital Output Module RED
+DC- 0 +DC- 0 +DC- 0 +DC- 0 +DC- 0 +DC- 0 +DC- 0
2 4 6
8 12 13
GND- 0 +DC- 1 +DC- 1 +DC- 1 +DC- 1 +DC- 1 +DC- 1 +DC- 1
16
15
18
17
GND- 1 GND- 1 NOT USED
32
BLACK
14
22
21
24
23
OUT- 11
19
G A R G A R
DO6 DO7 DO8 DO9 DO10 DO11
PART SENSOR FAULT INDICATOR STATION OUTPUT (REJECT) STATION OUTPUT (PALLETIZE) LINE ACTIVE
26 28 30
34 36
BLACK
RED
OUT- 6 OUT- 7 OUT- 8 OUT- 9 OUT- 10
20
APPLICATION OUTPUT
WORKSTATION LABEL DEVICE
10
A
- GREEN PILOT LIGHT - AMBER PILOT LIGHT
R
- RED PILOT LIGHT
G
+24VDC
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. WDAa56r
I/O Wiring Diagrams For The Assembly Application
A--4
Slot 7 - 1756-OF6VI Analog Output Module WORKSTATION DEVICE
AO1 (Channel 1)
AO0 Return
WORKSTATION DEVICE OUT- 1
2
1
OUT- 0
NOT USED
4
3
NOT USED
RTN- 1
6
5
RTN- 0
OUT- 3
8
7
OUT- 2
NOT USED
10
9
NOT USED
RTN- 3
12
11
RTN- 2
NOT USED
14
13
NOT USED
OUT- 5
16
15
OUT- 4
NOT USED
18
17
NOT USED
RTN- 5
20
19
RTN- 4
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
AO0 (Channel 0)
AO1 Return
Rev. August 2012 WDAa56r
I/O Wiring Diagrams For The Assembly Application
A--5
Slot 8 - 1756-IF6I Analog Input Module +10VDC
+10VDC WORKSTATION DEVICE
AI1 (Channel 1)
AI1 Return
Rev. August 2012
WORKSTATION DEVICE
IN- 1/V
2
1
IN- 0/V
IN- 1/I
4
3
IN- 0/I
RET- 1
6
5
RET- 0
IN- 3/V
8
7
IN- 2/V
IN- 3/I
10
9
IN- 2/I
RET- 3
12
11
RET- 2
NOT USED
14
13
NOT USED
IN- 5/V
16
15
IN- 4/V
IN- 5/I
18
17
IN- 4/I
RET- 5
20
19
RET- 4
AI0 (Channel 0)
AI0 Return
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. WDAa56r
A--6
I/O Wiring Diagrams For The Assembly Application
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 WDAa56r
Rev. August 2012
DI6
DI5
DI11 DO11 DI15
DI10 DO8 DI14
DO5 DI13
DI12
DO10
DI7
DI3 DO9
DI9
DO4
DO6
DO3
DO7
DI2
DI1
Outputs (6- 11 in Slot 4)
DI8 DO2
DI4 DO1
DI0 DO0
Outputs (0- 5 in Slot 0)
Inputs Run Left to Right (All Wired to Slot 2)
Ch01 Analog Meter Output
Ch00 Analog Meter Output
Ch01 Analog Meter Input
Ch00 Analog Meter Input
Appendix
B
ControlLogix Workstation I/O Device Assignments
The following standard ControlLogix workstation inputs and outputs are used in this course (Local I/O tags are listed on the next page):
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. WI3a56r
B--2
ControlLogix Workstation I/O Device Assignments
Local I/O Tags
The devices used in the workstation have the following I/O base tags: Module
Digital Input wired to Slot 2
Digital Output wired to Slot 0
Digital Output wired to Slot 4
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Workstation Device DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 DI13 DI14 DI15 D00 D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D010 D011
I/O Base Tag Local:2:I.Data.0 Local:2:I.Data.1 Local:2:I.Data.2 Local:2:I.Data.3 Local:2:I.Data.4 Local:2:I.Data.5 Local:2:I.Data.6 Local:2:I.Data.7 Local:2:I.Data.8 Local:2:I.Data.9 Local:2:I.Data.10 Local:2:I.Data.11 Local:2:I.Data.12 Local:2:I.Data.13 Local:2:I.Data.14 Local:2:I.Data.15 Local:0.O.Data.0 Local:0.O.Data.1 Local:0.O.Data.2 Local:0.O.Data.3 Local:0.O.Data.4 Local:0.O.Data.5 Local:4:O.Data.6 Local:4:O.Data.7 Local:4:O.Data.8 Local:4:O.Data.9 Local:4:O.Data.10 Local:4:O.Data.11
Rev. August 2012 WI3a56r
Appendix
C
Node Assignments If you are in an environment with multiple workstations on a ControlNet or EtherNet/IP network, ask your network specialist to supply the following information: EtherNet or EtherNet/IP Network Workstation Number
1756-ENBT IP Address
ControlNet Network 1756-CNB or 1756- CN2 Node Address*
1784- PCICS Card Node Address
1784- PCC Card Node Address
1784-KTCX15 Interface Card
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Rev. August 2012
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. NO3a56r
C--2
Node Assignments
E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. August 2012 NO3a56r
The following are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.: 1336 FORCE 1336 PLUS ControlBus Data Highway Plus DriveTools Flex Logix5000 PanelBuilder PLC-5 PowerFlex RSLinx RSView SCANPort SoftLogix
1336 IMPACT CompactLogix ControlLogix DH+ FactoryTalk FlexLogix Logix5550 PanelView PHOTOSWITCH RediSTATION RSLogix RSNetWorx SLC Ultra
EtherNet/IP and ControlNet are trademarks of ControlNet International Ltd. DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA). The following are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation: MS-DOS Windows
PowerPoint Windows NT
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Catalog Number ABT-CCP143-TSM -- August 2012 Supersedes Catalog Number ABT-CCP143-TSM - June 2012 E 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA
